Sony DVR DCR TRV75 User Manual

3-080-162-12(1)  
Dig it a l  
Vid e o Ca m e ra  
Re co rd e r  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,  
and retain it for future reference.  
Owners Record  
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the  
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers  
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.  
Model No. DCR-TRV  
Model No. AC-  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
TM  
SERIES  
DCR-TRV80  
DCR-TRV75/TRV80  
©2003 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We lco m e !  
Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. With your Handycam, you can  
capture lifes precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Handycam is  
loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be  
producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.  
a n d CANADA  
WARNING  
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do  
not expose the unit to rain or  
moisture.  
CAUTION  
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH  
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES  
Lithium-Ion batteries are  
recyclable.  
You can help preserve our  
environment by returning  
your used rechargeable  
batteries to the collection and  
recycling location nearest you.  
For more information regarding recycling of  
rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-  
8837, or visit http:/ / www.rbrc.org/  
This symbol is intended to  
alert the user to the presence  
of uninsulated “dangerous  
voltage” within the products  
enclosure that may be of  
sufficient magnitude to  
constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking  
Lithium-Ion batteries.  
Me m o ry St ick”  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must  
accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
This symbol is intended to  
alert the user to the presence  
of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing)  
instructions in the literature  
accompanying the appliance.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
CAUTION  
DCR-TRV80 o n ly  
The use of optical instruments with this  
product will increase eye hazard. As the laser  
beam used in this Handycam is harmful to  
eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the  
cabinet.  
You can only use the Bluetooth wireless  
connection function in the country or area  
where you purchase the devices.  
For details, refer to the separate Network  
Function/ Application Operating Instructions.  
Refer to servicing to qualified personnel only.  
Notice  
If static electricity or electromagnetism causes  
data transfer to discontinue midway (fail),  
restart the application or disconnect and  
connect the USB cable again.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
If you have any questions about this product,  
you may call:  
Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-  
SONY (7669)  
The number below is for the FCC related  
matters only.  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Regulatory Information  
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y  
Trade Name:  
Model No.:  
SONY  
DCR-TRV80  
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.  
Address:  
680 Kinderkamack  
Road, Oradell,  
NJ07649 U.S.A.  
201-930-6972  
Telephone No.:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device  
may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2)this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/ TV technician for help.  
DCR-TRV80 o n ly  
IMPORTANT NOTE  
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance  
requirements, the following antenna  
installation and device operating  
The supplied interface cable must be used  
with the equipment in order to comply with  
the limits for a digital device pursuant to  
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
configurations must be satisfied: the antenna  
has been installed by the manufacturer and no  
changes can be made.  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in CANADA  
This device and its antenna (s) must not be co-  
located or operating in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter.  
DCR-TRV80 o n ly  
The term “IC:” before the radio certification  
number only signifies that Industry Canada  
technical specifications were met.  
CAUTION  
You are cautioned that any changes or  
modifications not expressly approved in this  
manual could void your authority to operate  
this equipment.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
• Recording moving pictures on the  
tape (p. 25)  
• Playing back the tape (p. 37)  
• Recording still images on the  
“Memory Stick” (p. 44, 107)  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s  
o r st ill im a g e s, a n d p la yin g  
t h e m b a ck  
• Recording moving pictures on the  
“Memory Stick” (p. 120)  
• Viewing still images recorded on  
the “Memory Stick” (p. 128)  
• Viewing moving pictures recorded  
on the “Memory Stick” (p. 130)  
• Viewing moving pictures recorded on  
the tape using the USB cable (p. 154)  
• Viewing images recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” using the USB cable  
(p. 161, 166)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n t h e  
co m p u t e r  
• Capturing images on the computer  
from your camcorder using the USB  
cable (p. 156)  
• Converting an analog signal into  
digital to capture images onto the  
computer (p. 167)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
• You can access the Internet using  
a Bluetooth device (optional) or a  
dedicated accessory that serves  
as a USB Network Adaptor  
(optional) etc.  
• You can use the following  
functions by connecting to a  
Bluetooth device (optional) using  
BIP.  
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk  
a n d u sin g BIP  
(DCR-TRV80 o n ly)  
Remote Camera  
Image Transport  
For details, refer to the Network  
Function/ Application  
Operating Instructions supplied  
with your camcorder. (DCR-  
TRV80 only) (p. 169)  
Ot h e r u se s  
Functions for adjusting exposure during recording  
• Back light function (p. 32)  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter (p. 32)  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 57)  
• Manual exposure (p. 59)  
• Flexible Spot Meter (p. 60)  
• Recording images with the flash (p. 111)  
Functions for giving images more impact  
• Digital zoom (p. 31)  
The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 10×,  
select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings.)  
• Fader (p. 50)  
• Picture effect (p. 53)  
• Digital effect (p. 54)  
• Title (p. 95)  
• MEMORY MIX (p. 116)  
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 57)  
– SPORTS  
– LANDSCAPE  
• Manual focus (p. 61)  
• Expanded focus (p. 61)  
• Spot Focus (p. 63)  
Functions for using after recording  
• End search/ Edit search/ Rec Review (p. 35)  
• Data code (p. 38)  
• Tape PB ZOOM/ Memory PB ZOOM (p. 71, 133)  
• Zero set memory (p. 72)  
• Title search (p. 73)  
5
• Digital program editing (p. 78, 125)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Focusing manually ................................ 61  
Using spot focus function  
Ma in Fe a t u re s ...................................... 4  
– Spot Focus .................................... 63  
Interval Recording ................................ 64  
Frame by frame recording  
– Frame recording .......................... 65  
Recording with all the pixels  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e  
– Recording on tape ................................ 8  
– Recording on “Memory Stick” ......... 10  
Ge t t in g St a rt e d  
– Progressive Recording Mode .... 66  
Using the viewfinder ............................ 67  
Using this manual ................................. 12  
Checking supplied accessories ............ 14  
Step 1 Preparing the power source..... 15  
Installing the battery pack ............. 15  
Charging the battery pack ............. 16  
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 19  
Step 2 Setting the date and time ......... 20  
Step 3 Using the touch panel ............... 23  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck  
Op e ra t io n s  
Playing back tape  
with picture effect .......................... 69  
Playing back tape  
with digital effect ............................ 70  
Enlarging images recorded on tape  
– Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 71  
Quickly locating a scene  
– Zero set memory ......................... 72  
Searching the boundaries of recorded  
tape by title – Title search ............. 73  
Searching a recording by date  
– Date search ................................... 74  
Re co rd in g – Ba sics  
Recording a picture ............................... 25  
Shooting backlit subjects  
– Back light function ................ 32  
Shooting in the dark  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/  
Color Slow Shutter .................. 32  
Checking recordings  
– End search/ Edit search/ Rec  
Review ............................................. 35  
Ed it in g  
Dubbing tape ......................................... 76  
Dubbing only desired scenes  
Pla yb a ck – Ba sics  
– Digital program editing  
Playing back tape .................................. 37  
To display the screen indicators  
– Display function ................... 38  
Viewing a recording on TV ................. 42  
(on tape) ........................................... 78  
Recording video or TV programs ....... 87  
Inserting a scene from a VCR  
– Insert editing ................................ 89  
Audio dubbing ...................................... 91  
Superimposing a title on a cassette  
with Cassette Memory ................... 95  
Making your own titles ........................ 97  
Labeling a cassette on a cassette  
with Cassette Memory ................... 98  
Erasing all the data in  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g  
Op e ra t io n s  
Recording still images on “Memory  
Stick” during tape recording  
standby or tape recording ............. 44  
Self-timer recording .............................. 46  
Adjusting the white balance  
Cassette Memory ............................ 99  
manually .......................................... 47  
Using the wide mode ........................... 48  
Using the fader function ...................... 50  
Using special effects  
– Picture effect ................................. 53  
Using special effects – Digital effect ... 54  
Using PROGRAM AE .......................... 57  
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 59  
Using spot light-metering function  
– Flexible Spot Meter ..................... 60  
Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s  
Using “Memory Stick”  
– Introduction ............................... 100  
Selecting the quality and size of  
image data ..................................... 103  
Recording still images on  
“Memory Stick”  
– Memory Photo recording ......... 107  
Recording an image from tape as a  
still image ...................................... 114  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Superimposing a still image in  
“Memory Stick” on an image  
Capturing images from an analog  
video unit on a computer  
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 116  
Interval Photo Recording ................... 119  
Recording moving pictures on  
“Memory Stick”  
– MPEG MOVIE recording ......... 120  
Self-timer recording ............................ 122  
Recording a picture from tape  
as a moving picture ...................... 123  
Recording edited pictures from tape  
as a moving picture  
– Signal convert function ............. 167  
Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n  
(DCR-TRV80 o n ly)  
For details, refer to the Network Function/  
Application Operating Instructions  
supplied with your camcorder.  
Accessing the network ....................... 169  
Using applications .............................. 171  
– Digital program editing  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r  
(on “Memory Stick”) .................... 125  
Changing the recording folder .......... 127  
Viewing a still image  
– Memory Photo playback .......... 128  
Viewing a moving picture  
– MPEG MOVIE playback .......... 130  
Choosing playback folder .................. 132  
Enlarging still images recorded on  
“Memory Stick”  
Changing the menu settings .............. 172  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g  
Types of trouble and how to correct  
trouble ............................................ 183  
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 191  
Warning indicators ............................. 192  
Warning messages .............................. 193  
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 133  
Playing back images continuously  
– Slide show .................................. 134  
Preventing accidental erasure  
– Image protection ........................ 135  
Deleting images – DELETE ............... 136  
Changing image size – Resize ........... 139  
Writing a print mark – Print mark ... 140  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n  
Usable cassettes ................................... 194  
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery  
pack ................................................ 197  
About i.LINK ....................................... 199  
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 201  
Maintenance information and  
precautions .................................... 202  
Specifications ....................................... 208  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a  
co m p u t e r  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce  
Viewing images with a computer  
– Introduction ............................... 141  
Connecting your camcorder to a  
computer using the USB cable  
(For Windows users).................... 144  
Viewing pictures recorded on tape  
on a computer  
Identifying parts and controls ........... 210  
Index ..................................................... 217  
– USB Streaming  
(For Windows users).................... 154  
Viewing images recorded on  
“Memory Stick” on a computer  
(For Windows users).................... 161  
Connecting your camcorder to a  
computer using the USB cable  
(For Macintosh users) .................. 164  
Viewing images recorded on  
“Memory Stick” on a computer  
(For Macintosh users) .................. 166  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n t a p e  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).  
Open the DC IN jack cover.  
AC Adaptor (supplied)  
Connect the plug with its v mark facing up.  
In se rt in g t h e ca sse t t e  
3 Close the cassette  
1 Slide  
OPEN/  
EJECT in the  
2 Push the center of the  
cassette back to insert  
the cassette. Insert the  
cassette straight as far  
as possible into the  
cassette compartment  
with the window  
compartment by  
pressing  
cassette  
on the  
direction of the arrow  
and open the lid.  
compartment.  
After the cassette  
compartment goes  
down completely,  
close the lid until it  
clicks.  
facing up.  
To e je ct t h e ca sse t t e  
Follow the procedures above, and take out the cassette after the cassette compartment  
opens completely in step 3.  
Note  
Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a  
malfunction.  
2
1
How to hold  
your camcorder  
Fastening the grip belt  
Fasten the grip belt firmly.  
3
4
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re o n t h e t a p e (p . 25)  
2Set the POWER switch  
1Remove the lens cap.  
to CAMERA while  
pressing the small  
green button.  
3Press OPEN  
to open the  
LCD panel.  
The picture  
appears on  
the screen.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
4Press START/ STOP. Your  
camcorder starts recording. To  
stop recording, press START/  
STOP again.  
View finder  
When the LCD panel is closed,  
use the viewfinder with your eye  
against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to  
your eyesight (p. 30).  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date  
and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 37)  
2Press  
of the touch panel to  
rewind the tape.  
1Set the POWER  
switch to VCR  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
while pressing the  
small green button.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
3Press  
start playback.  
of the touch panel to  
Note  
When using the touch panel, press  
operation buttons lightly with your  
finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-  
TRV80 only) supporting the LCD panel  
from the back side of it. Do not press  
the LCD screen with sharp objects other  
than the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV80  
only).  
Do not pick up your camcorder  
by holding parts as illustrated.  
9
View finder  
LCD panel Battery pack  
Flash  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).  
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
AC Adaptor (supplied)  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
In se rt in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 102)  
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the B mark  
facing up as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
B mark  
Press the “Memory Stick”  
once lightly to eject it.  
While the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or strike your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data from  
the “Memory Stick” or recording the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the  
power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data  
breakdown may occur.  
2
1
How to hold  
Fastening the grip belt  
Fasten the grip belt firmly.  
your camcorder  
3
4
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 107)  
1Remove the lens cap (p. 25).  
2Set the POWER switch  
to MEMORY while  
pressing the small green  
button.  
3Press OPEN  
to open the  
LCD panel.  
The picture  
appears on  
the screen.  
Make sure that the  
LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock)  
position.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
View finder  
When the LCD panel is  
closed, use the  
viewfinder with your  
eye against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder  
lens to your eyesight  
(p. 30).  
4Press PHOTO lightly.  
When the green mark  
stops flashing, then lights  
up, you can record a still  
image.  
5Press PHOTO deeply.  
The image when you  
pressed PHOTO deeply will  
be recorded on the “Memory  
Stick.”  
FINE  
FINE  
640  
640  
12  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date  
and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 128)  
1Set the POWER  
VCR  
switch to MEMORY  
OFF(CHG)  
while pressing the  
small green button.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
2Press PLAY. The last  
recorded image is  
displayed.  
PLAY  
Do not pick up your camcorder  
by holding parts as illustrated.  
11  
View finder Flash  
LCD panel Battery pack  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before  
you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number  
by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV80 is the model used for  
illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any  
differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCR-TRV80  
only.”  
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in  
capital letters.  
After “Advanced Recording Operations” section of this manual, position of the POWER  
switch is shown by the icons below.  
: Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
VCR  
: Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
: Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK  
(DCR-TRV80 only).  
DCR-TRV80 only  
The MEMORY/ NETWORK position of the POWER switch is shown as MEMORY or  
in this manual.  
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is  
being carried out.  
Types of differences  
DCR-  
TRV75  
MEMORY  
TRV80  
Mark on the POWER switch  
Network function  
MEMORY/ NETWORK  
z
z
Provided  
Not provided  
No t e o n Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes with  
your camcorder. We recommend that you use a cassette with Cassette Memory  
.
Cassettes with Cassette Memory have the  
(Cassette Memory) mark.  
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s  
TV color systems differ depending on the country or area. To view your recordings on a  
TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV.  
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s  
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the copyright laws.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
No t e o n co n n e ct in g t o o t h e r d e vice s  
If you connect your camcorder to a VCR or computer using the USB cable or the i.LINK  
cable, make sure that the jack is connected in the right direction. Pushing it forcibly may  
damage the jack or cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re  
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r (o n m o u n t e d m o d e ls o n ly)  
The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision  
technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.  
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,  
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.  
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the  
recording in any w ay.  
• Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea  
water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].  
Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a  
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].  
• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD  
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause  
malfunctions [c].  
• Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s  
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.  
1
4
9
qf  
2
7
qs  
3
8
qd  
5
q;  
6
qa  
1 AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor (1), Pow er  
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 25)  
cord (1) (p. 16)  
8 Lens hood (1) (p. 30)  
2 NP-FM50 rechargeable battery pack  
9 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 100)  
(1) (p. 15, 16)  
0 USB cable (1) (p. 141)  
3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 42)  
qa CD-ROM (SPVD-010 USB Driver) (1)  
4 Wireless Remote Commander (1)  
(p. 146)  
(p. 215)  
qs Cleaning cloth (1) (p. 203)  
qd Stylus (1) (DCR-TRV80 only) (p. 170)  
qf Shoe cover (1) (p. 92)  
5 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote  
Commander (2) (p. 215)  
6 Shoulder strap (1)  
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a  
malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.  
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT  
down.  
1
2
BATT release  
button  
2
If you use the large capacity battery pack  
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D battery pack on your  
camcorder, extend its viewfinder.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.  
Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series).  
See page 197 for details of “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.  
(1) Install the battery pack on your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with  
the DC plugs v mark facing up.  
(3) Connect the power cord to the AC Adaptor.  
(4) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.  
(5) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery  
time is indicated in minutes in the display window.  
When the remaining battery time indicator changes to  
, normal charge is complete.  
To fully charge the battery pack (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about  
one hour after normal charge is complete until the FULL indicator appears in the  
display window. Fully charging the battery pack allows you to use the battery pack  
longer than usual.  
3
2
5
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Disconnect the AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Note  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of  
the AC Adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC Adaptor.  
When you use the AC Adaptor  
Place the AC Adaptor near a wall outlet. While using the AC Adaptor if any trouble  
occurs with this unit, disconnect the plug from a wall outlet as soon as possible to cut  
off the power.  
Remaining battery time indicator  
The remaining battery time indicator in the display window indicates the approximate  
recording time when recording with the viewfinder.  
Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time  
“---- min” appears in the display window.  
Ch a rg in g t im e  
Battery pack  
Full charge (Normal charge)  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
150 (90)  
240 (180)  
260 (200)  
360 (300)  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
Approximate minutes at 25°C (77°F) to charge an empty battery pack  
The charging time may increase if the batterys temperature is extremely high or low  
because of the ambient temperature.  
Re co rd in g t im e  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
70  
Continuous  
Typical*  
55  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
120  
250  
290  
445  
95  
145  
200  
230  
350  
115  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
170  
135  
260  
205  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery pack  
* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/  
stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off. The actual battery life may be shorter.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Pla yin g t im e  
Playing time  
w ith the LCD panel closed  
Playing time  
on the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
200  
415  
485  
725  
140  
295  
340  
520  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery pack  
Note  
Approximate recording time and continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery  
life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.  
Ch e ckin g st a t u s o f b a t t e ry p a ck – Ba t t e ry In fo  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO.  
The battery charge level (the percentage of remaining battery time) and  
remaining battery time when using the LCD screen or viewfinder are  
displayed for about seven seconds.  
If you keep pressing DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO, the Battery Info is displayed  
for up to about 20 seconds.  
3
BATTERY INFO  
BATTERY INFO  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
0%  
50%  
100%  
0%  
50%  
100%  
DISPLAY/  
BATTERY INFO  
REC TIME AVAILABLE  
LCD SCREEN : 76 min  
VIEWFINDER : 96 min  
REC TIME AVAILABLE  
LCD SCREEN : 95 min  
VIEWFINDER : 120 min  
During charging  
Fully charged  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Note  
The BATTERY INFO indicator is not displayed in the following cases:  
– The battery pack is not properly installed.  
– Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
– The battery pack is fully discharged.  
Battery Info  
The number displayed as Battery Info is the approximate recording time.  
While the remaining battery time is being calculated  
“CALCULATING BATTERY INFO...” is displayed.  
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t  
Connect in the same way as when charging the battery pack (p. 16).  
PRECAUTION  
The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (house current) as long as it is  
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.  
Notes  
• The AC Adaptor can supply power from a wall outlet even if the battery pack is  
attached to your camcorder.  
• The DC IN jack has “source priority.” This means that the battery pack cannot supply  
any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power  
cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. The “CLOCK  
SET” indicator will appear each time you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or  
MEMORY unless you set the date and time settings.  
If you do not set the date and time, “--- -- ----” and “--:--:--” are recorded on the tape or  
the “Memory Stick” as the data code.  
If you do not use your camcorder for about three months, the date and time settings  
may be released (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable battery installed in  
your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 204). In this case, charge the built-in  
rechargeable battery, then set your area, the daylight saving time (DST*), the year, the  
month, the day, the hour and the minute.  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Press FN (Function) to display PAGE1 (p. 23).  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Press r/ R to select  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press r/ R to select CLOCK SET, then press EXEC.  
(6) Press r/ R to select your area, then press EXEC.  
(7) Press r/ R to select whether your area is in the daylight saving time or not,  
then press EXEC.  
(8) Press r/ R to select a desired year, then press EXEC.  
(9) Set the month, day and hour with the same procedure as step 8.  
(10)Press r/ R to set the minute, then press EXEC by the time signal. The clock  
starts to move.  
4
6
8
5
7
EXIT  
––:––:––  
EXIT  
GMT +0.0  
CLOCK SET  
AREA  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LANGUAGE  
R
1
Lisbon, London  
r
DST OFF  
DEMO MODE  
DATE  
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – – : – –  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXIT  
EXIT  
GMT –5.0  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
GMT –5.0  
New York, Bogota  
New York, Bogota  
DST OFF  
DST OFF  
ON  
R
R
R
r
R
R
DATE  
Y
M
D
1
DATE  
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – – : – –  
2003 JAN  
12 : 00AM  
r
r
r
r
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
2
EXEC  
FN  
10  
EXIT  
JUL 4 2003  
5:30:00 PM  
EXIT  
GMT –5.0  
New York, Bogota  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LANGUAGE  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
DEMO MODE  
DST OFF  
R
R
R
r
R
r
R
R
DATE  
Y
M
D
1
2003 JAN  
12 : 00AM  
r
r
r
r
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
To re t u rn t o FN (Fu n ct io n )  
Press EXIT.  
When using your camcorder abroad  
Set the clock to the local time (p. 22).  
If you use your camcorder in an area w here daylight saving time is used  
Set DST SET in  
to ON in the menu settings.  
Note on the time indicator  
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.  
• 12:00 AM stands for midnight.  
• 12:00 PM stands for noon.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y t im e d iffe re n ce  
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select AREA  
SET and DST SET* in  
in the menu settings.  
See page 181 for details.  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
Wo rld t im e d iffe re n ce  
1920 21 22 23 2425 26 272930 31 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 121314 16 17 18  
Area  
code  
Time-zone  
differences  
Area  
code  
Time-zone  
differences  
Area setting  
Area setting  
1
2
GMT  
Lisbon, London  
Berlin, Paris  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
+11:00  
+12:00  
–12:00  
–11:00  
–10:00  
–09:00  
–08:00  
–07:00  
–06:00  
–05:00  
–04:00  
–03:30  
–03:00  
–02:00  
–01:00  
Solomon Is  
+01:00  
+02:00  
+03:00  
+03:30  
+04:00  
+04:30  
+05:00  
+05:30  
+06:00  
+06:30  
+07:00  
+08:00  
+09:00  
+09:30  
+10:00  
Fiji, Wellington  
Eniwetok, Kwajalein  
Midway Is., Samoa  
Hawaii  
3
Helsinki, Cairo  
Moscow, Nairobi  
Tehran  
4
5
6
Abu Dhabi, Baku  
Kabul  
Alaska  
7
LosAngeles, Tijuana  
Denver, Arizona  
Chicago, MexicoCity  
New York, Bogota  
Santiago  
8
Karachi, Islamabad  
Calcutta, New Delhi  
Almaty, Dhaka  
Rangoon  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Bangkok, Jakarta  
HongKong, Singapore  
Seoul, Tokyo  
St. John’s  
Brasilia, Montevideo  
Fernando de Noronha  
Azores  
Adelaide, Darwin  
Melbourne, Sydney  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 3 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
Your camcorder has operation buttons on the LCD screen.  
Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV80  
only) to operate each function.  
(1) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA to record, VCR to play back or MEMORY  
to use the “Memory Stick.”  
(3) Press FN. Operation buttons on PAGE1 are displayed on the LCD screen.  
(4) Press PAGE2/ PAGE3 to display PAGE2/ PAGE3. Operation buttons on  
PAGE2/ PAGE3 are displayed on the LCD screen.  
(5) Press a desired operation item. See relevant pages of this manual for each  
function.  
When the POWER switch  
3
is set to CAMERA  
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT  
SPOT  
FOCUS  
SPOT  
METER  
MENU FADER END  
SCH  
EXPO-  
SURE  
1
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To e xe cu t e se t t in g s  
Press  
OK. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
To ca n ce l se t t in g s  
Press  
OFF. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
To m a ke scre e n in d ica t o rs d isa p p e a r  
Press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
St e p 3 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
Op e ra t io n b u t t o n s o n e a ch d isp la y  
When the POWER sw itch is set to CAMERA  
PAGE1 SPOT FOCUS, MENU, FADER, END SCH, SPOT METER, EXPOSURE  
PAGE2 SELFTIMER, DIG EFFT, LCD BRT, VOL, MEM MIX  
PAGE3 SUPER NS, COLOR SLW S, PRGRE REC, RMT CAM*  
When the POWER sw itch is set to VCR  
PAGE1 MENU, LCD BRT, VOL, END SCH  
PAGE2 PB ZOOM, DIG EFFT, DATA CODE  
PAGE3 V SPD PLAY, A DUB CTRL, REC CTRL  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
During memory camera  
PAGE1 SPOT FOCUS, MENU, PLAY, PB FOLDR, SPOT METER, EXPOSURE  
PAGE2 SELFTIMER, PLAY, MEM MIX  
PAGE3 LCD BRT, PLAY, IMAGE TRANS*, VOL  
During memory playback  
PAGE1 MENU, CAM, PB FOLDR, DEL  
PAGE2 PB ZOOM, CAM, RESIZE, DATA CODE  
PAGE3 LCD BRT, CAM, IMAGE TRANS*, VOL  
* DCR-TRV80 only  
Notes  
• When using the touch panel, press operation buttons lightly with your finger or the  
supplied stylus (DCR-TRV80 only) supporting the LCD panel from the back side of it.  
• Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the supplied stylus. (DCR-  
TRV80 only)  
• Do not press the LCD screen too hard.  
• Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.  
• If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You  
can control the display with DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO on your camcorder.  
When executing each item  
The green bar appears above the item.  
If the items are not available  
The color of the items changes to gray.  
Touch panel  
You can operate with the touch panel using the viewfinder (p. 67).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Re co rd in g – Ba sics —  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
See relevant “Step 1” and “Step 2.”  
(1) Remove the lens cap and pull the lens cap string to fix it.  
(2) Prepare the power source (p. 15 to 19) and insert the cassette (p. 8).  
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.  
This sets your camcorder to standby.  
(4) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The picture appears on the screen.  
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator  
appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder  
lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.  
3
1
LOCK sw itch  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
4
Microphone  
Camera recording  
lamp  
2
REC 0:00:01  
50min  
5
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Note on recording  
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP  
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 179). In the LP mode, you can  
record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.  
When you record the tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder.  
To enable smooth transition  
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as  
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.  
However, check the following:  
– Do not mix recordings in the SP and LP modes on one tape.  
– When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
Self-timer recording  
You can record images on the tape with the self-timer. See page 46 for details.  
Note  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) do not appear during  
recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote  
Commander for this operation (p. 38).  
If you leave your camcorder during standby for five minutes w hile the cassette is  
inserted  
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent  
battery pack and tape wear. To return to standby, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)  
and then back to CAMERA. However, your camcorder does not turn off automatically  
while the cassette is not inserted.  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record in the LP  
mode  
• The transition between scenes may not be smooth.  
• The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly  
between scenes.  
Note on the LOCK sw itch  
When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set  
to MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the left as the default setting.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d d u rin g re co rd in g  
Indicators are not recorded on the tape.  
Remaining battery time  
Cassette Memory  
This appears when using the cassette with Cassette Memory.  
Recording mode  
STBY/REC  
Time code/Tape counter  
REC 0:00:01  
50min  
60min  
Remaining tape  
This appears after you insert the cassette.  
JUL  
4
2003  
12:05:56PM  
FN  
FN button  
Press this button to display operation buttons on the  
LCD screen.  
Time  
The time appears about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Date  
The date appears about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Remaining battery time indicator during recording  
The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the continuous recording time.  
The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are  
recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute  
for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.  
Time code  
The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes :  
seconds) in CAMERA and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR.  
You cannot rewrite only the time code.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
during recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote  
Commander for this operation (p. 38).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Aft e r re co rd in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Close the LCD panel.  
(3) Eject the cassette.  
(4) Remove the power source.  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n  
180°  
90°  
When you adjust the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up to 90  
degrees.  
Note  
When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder automatically  
turns off.  
When monitoring on the LCD screen  
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with the  
LCD screen facing out.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e m irro r m o d e  
This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen.  
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you  
look at the subject in the viewfinder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Rotate the LCD panel 180 degrees.  
Picture in the mirror mode  
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal  
when recorded.  
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n  
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA, press FN and select PAGE2.  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR, press FN to display PAGE1.  
When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY, press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press LCD BRT. The screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen appears.  
(3) Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen using – (to dim)/ + (to brighten).  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3 in step 1.  
2,3  
LCD  
BRT  
OK  
LCD BRT  
+
The bar indicator  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
LCD screen backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in  
settings when using the battery pack (p. 175).  
in the menu  
Even if you adjust LCD BRT or LCD B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r  
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the images in the viewfinder come  
into sharp focus.  
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.  
The view finder lens  
adjustment lever  
View finder backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in  
settings when using the battery pack (p. 175).  
in the menu  
Even if you adjust VF B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
At t a ch in g t h e su p p lie d le n s h o o d  
To record fine pictures under strong light, we recommend attaching the lens hood. Also  
the lens cap can be attached even with the lens hood on.  
Note  
You cannot attach filters or other objects onto the lens hood.  
If you forcibly attach these objects onto the lens hood, you will no longer be able to  
remove filters or other objects from the hood.  
When you use the filter (optional)  
The shadow of the lens hood may appear in the corners of the screen.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re  
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.  
Using the zoom sparingly results in better-looking recordings.  
W : Wide-angle (subject appears farther away)  
T : Telephoto (subject appears closer)  
W
W
T
T
T
W
To use zoom greater than 10×  
Zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 20× or 120×.  
To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in  
settings (p. 174). The digital zoom is set to OFF as a default setting.  
in the menu  
W
T
The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming  
zone.  
The digital zooming zone appears when you select  
the digital zoom power in the menu settings.  
When you shoot close to a subject  
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the “W” side until the  
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 5/ 8 feet)  
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)  
away in the wide-angle position.  
Note on digital zoom  
The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the “T”  
side.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You cannot use the digital zoom.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g b a cklit su b je ct s – Ba ck lig h t fu n ct io n  
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a  
light background, use the back light function.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Press BACK LIGHT.  
The . indicator appears on the screen.  
BACK LIGHT  
To ca n ce l t h e b a ck lig h t fu n ct io n  
Press BACK LIGHT again.  
When shooting backlit subjects  
If you press MANUAL of EXPOSURE (p. 59) or SPOT METER (p. 60), the back light  
function will be canceled.  
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk  
– Nig h t Sh o t /Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t /Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t  
NightShot enables you to shoot a subject in the night or in a dark place.  
When recording with NightShot, the picture may be recorded in incorrect or unnatural  
colors.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
The  
and ”NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the screen.  
NIGHTSHOT  
OFF  
ON  
NightShot Light emitter  
To cancel NightShot  
32  
Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t  
Super NightShot makes subjects more than 16 times brighter than those recorded in  
NightShot.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
The  
and ”NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the screen.  
(3) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(4) Press SUPER NS.  
The  
indicator lights up on the screen.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
To cancel Super NightShot  
Press SUPER NS again to return to NightShot.  
Usin g t h e Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t  
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable the NightShot Light,  
set N.S. LIGHT in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
Color Slow Shutter enables you to record color images in a dim place.  
NIGHTSHOT  
OFF  
ON  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
(3) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(4) Press COLOR SLW S.  
The  
indicator lights up on the screen.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
To cancel Color Slow Shutter  
Press COLOR SLW S again to make the  
indicator disappear.  
Notes  
• Do not use NightShot in bright places (e.g. the outdoors in the daytime). This may  
cause a malfunction.  
• If focusing is difficult during recording with NightShot, focus manually.  
While using NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– White balance  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
HOLOGRAM AF  
While using Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. At this time,  
the motion of the picture may slow down.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
While using Super NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– White balance  
– Fader  
– Digital effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
– Recording with the flash  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You cannot use the following functions:  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
NightShot Light  
The NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting  
distance using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).  
While using Color Slow Shutter, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Fader  
– Digital effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
– Recording with the flash  
In total darkness  
Color Slow Shutter may not work normally.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s  
– En d se a rch /Ed it se a rch /Re c Re vie w  
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition  
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.  
FN  
EDITSEARCH  
En d se a rch  
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press END SCH.  
The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your  
camcorder returns to standby.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l e n d se a rch  
Press END SCH again.  
End search  
When you use the cassette without Cassette Memory, end search does not work once  
you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a cassette with  
Cassette Memory, end search works even once you eject the cassette.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
End search may not work correctly.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s – En d se a rch /Ed it se a rch /Re c Re vie w  
Ed it se a rch  
You can search for the next recording start point. You cannot monitor the sound.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Hold down the EDITSEARCH. The recorded portion is played back.  
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, recording  
begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH.  
7 : To go backwards  
+ : To go forwards  
Re c Re vie w  
You can check the last recorded section.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Press the 7 – side of EDITSEARCH momentarily.  
The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few  
seconds, and then your camcorder will return to standby.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Pla yb a ck – Ba sics —  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e  
You can monitor the recorded tape on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you  
can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback using  
the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
(1) Press the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Press  
(4) Press  
to rewind the tape.  
to start playback.  
(5) Adjust the volume following the steps below.  
1 Press FN to display PAGE1.  
2 Press VOL. The screen to adjust volume appears.  
3 Press – (to turn down the volume)/ + (to turn up the volume).  
4 Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
4
1
3
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
2
5
OK  
VOL  
+
The bar indicator  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l p la yb a ck  
Press  
.
To re w in d t h e t a p e  
Press  
during playback stop.  
To fa st fo rw a rd t h e t a p e  
Press  
during playback stop.  
To vie w a st ill im a g e (p la yb a ck p a u se )  
Press  
during playback. To resume playback, press  
again.  
If you leave the pow er on for a long time  
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.  
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs – Disp la y fu n ct io n  
Press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO on your camcorder or DISPLAY on the Remote  
Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
The indicators disappear from the screen.  
To make the indicators appear, press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO or DISPLAY on the  
Remote Commander again.  
DATA CODE  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY/  
BATTERY INFO  
Note  
Even if you press DISPLAY on the Remote Commander with the POWER switch set to  
OFF(CHG), the BATTERY INFO indicator is not displayed.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e  
Ab o u t d a t e /t im e a n d va rio u s se t t in g s  
Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the  
recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) (Data code).  
Follow the steps below to display the data code using the touch panel or the Remote  
Commander.  
Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR, then play back the tape.  
(2) During playback, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(3) Press DATA CODE.  
(4) Select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press  
OK.  
(5) Press EXIT.  
Date/time  
Various settings  
0:00:23:01  
50min  
[a ]  
0:00:23:01  
50min  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
F1.8 dB  
JUL  
4
2003  
9
[e ]  
12:05:56 PM  
[f]  
[g ]  
[a ] Tape counter  
[b ] SteadyShot off  
[c] Exposure  
[d ] White balance  
[e ] Gain  
[f] Shutter speed  
[g ] Aperture value  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback.  
The display changes as follows:  
date/ time t various settings (SteadyShot off, exposure, white balance, gain, shutter  
speed, aperture value) t (no indicator)  
Various settings  
Various settings shows your camcorders recording information at the time of  
recording. During tape recording standby, the various settings will not be displayed.  
When you use data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if:  
– A blank portion of the tape is being played back.  
– The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.  
– The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.  
Data code  
When you connect your camcorder to a TV, the data code also appears on the TV  
screen.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e  
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s  
To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.  
Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
(1) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press V SPD PLAY to display video control buttons.  
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n  
Press  
during playback to reverse the playback direction.1)  
To lo ca t e a sce n e w h ile m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )  
Keep pressing  
button.  
or  
during playback. To resume normal playback, release the  
To m o n it o r t h e h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re w h ile fa st fo rw a rd in g o r  
re w in d in g t h e t a p e (skip sca n )  
Keep pressing  
while fastforwarding or  
while rewinding the tape. To resume  
fastforwarding or rewinding, release the button.  
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)  
Press  
press  
during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press  
, then  
1)  
.
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t d o u b le sp e e d  
Press  
during playback. For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press  
1)  
, then press  
.
To vie w t h e p ict u re fra m e -b y-fra m e  
Press  
For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press  
during playback pause.2)  
2)  
.
To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)  
Press END SCH on PAGE1 during stop. The last five seconds of the recorded section  
are played back then your camcorder stops.  
1) Press  
2) Press  
to pause playback. Press  
to resume normal playback.  
to resume normal playback.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e  
Video control buttons  
Marks on your camcorder are different from those on the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder.  
On your camcorder:  
To play back or pause the tape  
To stop the tape  
To rewind the tape  
To fastforward the tape  
To play back the tape slowly  
To forward one frame at a time  
To rewind one frame at a time  
To play back the tape at double speed  
On the Remote Commander:  
N
X
To play back the tape  
To pause the tape  
x
To stop the tape  
m
M
y
To rewind the tape  
To fastforward the tape  
To play back the tape slowly  
C To forward one frame at a time  
c
×2  
To rewind one frame at a time  
To play back the tape at double speed  
In the various playback modes  
• Sound is muted.  
• The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.  
When playback pause lasts for five minutes  
Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press  
.
When you play back the tape in reverse  
Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is  
not a malfunction.  
Slow playback  
Slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this function  
does not work for an output signal from the DV Interface.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g a re co rd in g o n TV  
Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your  
camcorder to watch the playback pictures on the TV screen. You can operate the  
playback control buttons in the same way as when you view playback pictures on the  
LCD screen.  
When viewing the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power  
your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC Adaptor. Refer to the operating  
instructions of your TV.  
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable.  
Then set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR to be able to view images from your  
camcorder.  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
IN  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
TV  
: Signal flow  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
Red  
White  
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o t h e VCR  
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR with the A/ V connecting  
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.  
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV.  
If you connect the white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug,  
the sound is R (right) signal.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g a re co rd in g o n TV  
If the device you w ant to connect to has an S video jack  
• Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With  
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and  
the device you want to connect to.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
• There is no sound output when connecting only with an S video cable (optional).  
To display the screen indicators on TV  
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/ LCD in  
in the menu settings (p. 181). To make the screen  
indicators disappear, press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO on your camcorder.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g  
t a p e re co rd in g st a n d b y o r t a p e re co rd in g  
Du rin g t a p e re co rd in g st a n d b y  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. The CAPTURE  
indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image,  
release PHOTO, select a still image again, then press and hold PHOTO lightly.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO deeply will be  
recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
FINE  
640  
12  
CAPTURE  
1
2
101  
FINE  
640  
101  
Du rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Press PHOTO deeply.  
The image displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO deeply will be recorded  
on the “Memory Stick.”  
Recording on the “Memory Stick” is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
st a n d b y o r t a p e re co rd in g  
Note  
You cannot record still images on the “Memory Stick” during following operations  
(The  
indicator flashes):  
– End search  
– Wide mode  
– During fading in with BOUNCE  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
– MEMORY MIX  
“Memory Stick”  
See page 100 for details.  
Still images  
• The image size will be 640 × 480.  
• If the POWER switch is set to CAMERA, image quality cannot be changed. Images  
will be recorded with image quality as set when the POWER switch is set to  
MEMORY.  
• When recording with higher image quality, use of Memory Photo recording is  
recommended (p. 107).  
During and after recording still images on the “Memory Stick”  
Your camcorder continues recording on the tape.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
To record still images on the “Memory Stick” during tape recording  
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when  
you press PHOTO deeply will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
Title  
You cannot record the titles.  
Self-timer recording  
During recording standby, you can record still images on the “Memory Stick” with the  
self-timer. See page 46 for details.  
Recording w ith the flash  
During recording standby, you can record still images on the “Memory Stick” with the  
flash. See page 111 for details.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
START/STOP  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
START/STOP  
Re co rd in g o n t h e t a p e  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During standby, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(4) Press START/ STOP.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 while beeping. In the last  
two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g re co rd in g  
st a n d b y  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow the step 1 to 3 in “Recording on the tape.”  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 while beeping. In the last  
two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then the recording starts  
automatically.  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n fo r re co rd in g o n t h e t a p e  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
With your camcorder during standby, press SELFTIMER and the  
(self-timer)  
indicator disappears from the screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer using the Remote  
Commander.  
Notes  
• The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when self-timer recording is  
finished.  
• You can record using the self-timer only during recording standby.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You can also record still images onto the “Memory Stick” with the self-timer (p. 122).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ad ju st in g t h e w h it e b a la n ce m a n u a lly  
Normally white balance is automatically adjusted.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select WHT BAL in  
, then press EXEC (p. 173).  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
P
EFFECT  
RED EYE  
R
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
AUTO  
HOLD  
OUTDOOR  
INDOOR  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
HOLD:  
When recording a single-colored subject or background  
OUTDOOR ( ):  
• When recording a sunset/ sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon signs, or  
fireworks  
• Under a color matching fluorescent lamp  
INDOOR (n):  
• When lighting conditions change quickly  
• In too bright places such as photography studios  
• Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic w h it e b a la n ce  
Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the menu settings.  
If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting  
We recommend that you record in the INDOOR mode.  
When you record under fluorescent lighting  
Select AUTO or HOLD.  
Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the INDOOR mode.  
In the AUTO mode  
Point your camcorder at the white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to CAMERA to get better adjustment when:  
– You remove the battery pack for replacement.  
– You bring your camcorder from indoors to outdoors holding the exposure, or vice  
versa.  
In the HOLD mode  
Set WHT BAL to AUTO and reset to HOLD after few seconds when:  
– You change the mode of PROGRAM AE.  
– You bring your camcorder from indoors to outdoors, or vice versa.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
If you move the power zoom lever to “W” side, you can record with a wider angles  
than normal tape recording.  
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on the 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).  
Black bands appear on the screen during recording in the 16:9WIDE mode [a ]. The  
picture during playing back in the 4:3 mode on a wide-screen TV [b ] or a normal TV  
[c]* are compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-  
screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d ].  
*The picture played back in the wide mode on a normal TV appears the same as the  
picture played back in the wide mode on your camcorder [a ].  
[d ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[a ]  
16:9WIDE  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During recording standby, press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select 16:9WIDE in  
, then press EXEC (p. 174).  
(4) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
CAMERA SET  
D ZOOM  
16:9WIDE  
ON  
STEADYSHOT  
N. S. LIGHT  
RMTCAM SET  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e  
Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
Notes  
• In the wide mode, you cannot operate the following functions:  
– Recording still images on the “Memory Stick” during tape recording or tape  
recording standby  
– BOUNCE  
– OLD MOVIE  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
• Pictures recorded on the tape in wide mode cannot be returned to normal size.  
Connection for a TV  
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full  
size when:  
– You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)  
system.  
– You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on a TV.  
ID-1 system  
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio information (16:9, 4:3, or letter box) with video  
signals. If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1 system, the screen size is  
automatically selected.  
ID-2 system  
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between  
video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
You can fade in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.  
[a ]  
STBY  
REC  
NORM. FADER  
(normal)  
MOSC. FADER  
(mosaic)  
BOUNCE1) 2)  
OVERLAP2)  
WIPE2)  
DOT2)  
[b ]  
STBY  
REC  
MONOTONE  
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.  
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.  
1) You can use BOUNCE when D ZOOM in  
2) You can fade in only.  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) When fading in [a ]  
Press FN to display PAGE1 during recording standby.  
When fading out [b ]  
Press FN to display PAGE1 during recording.  
(2) Press FADER. The screen to select the fader mode appears.  
(3) Press a desired mode.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The fader indicator you selected flashes.  
(6) Press START/ STOP.  
After the fade in/ out is carried out, your camcorder automatically returns to  
the normal mode.  
START/STOP  
2
FADER  
FADER  
OFF  
OK  
MOSC.  
FADER  
NORM.  
FADER  
BOUN–  
CE  
MONO– OVER– WIPE DOT  
TONE LAP  
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e in /o u t  
Before pressing START/ STOP, press  
OFF to return to PAGE1.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
Note  
You cannot use the following functions while using fader. Also, you cannot use fader  
while using following functions:  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Digital effect  
– Interval Recording  
– Frame recording  
– Recording with the flash  
When you select OVERLAP, WIPE or DOT  
Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on the tape. As the image is  
being stored, the indicator becomes fast flashing, then the playback picture disappears.  
During fading in w ith BOUNCE, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Zoom  
– Recording still images on the “Memory Stick”  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
– Manual focus  
Note on the BOUNCE mode  
You cannot select BOUNCE in the followings:  
– D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings  
– Wide mode  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Pict u re e ffe ct  
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.  
SEPIA :  
The picture is sepia.  
B&W :  
The picture is monochrome (black-and-white).  
SOLARIZE [b ] : The picture looks like an illustration with a strong contrast.  
PASTEL [c] : The picture looks like a pale pastel drawing.  
MOSAIC [d ] : The picture is mosaic.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select P EFFECT in , then press EXEC (p. 173).  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
P
EFFECT  
OFF  
RED EYE  
R
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
B&W  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
SOLARIZE  
PASTEL  
MOSAIC  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
Note  
While using picture effect, you cannot use following functions:  
– BOUNCE  
– OLD MOVIE  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct  
STILL  
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.  
FLASH (flash motion)  
You can record still images successively at regular intervals.  
LUMI. (luminance key)  
You can swap the brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.  
TRAIL  
You can record a picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.  
SLOW SHTR (slow shutter)  
You can slow down the shutter speed. The SLOW SHTR mode is good for recording  
dark pictures more brightly.  
OLD MOVIE  
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically  
sets the 16:9WIDE mode, picture effect to SEPIA, and the appropriate shutter speed.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
STILL  
LUMI.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a digital effect is displayed.  
(3) Press a desired mode. When you select STILL or LUMI., the still image is  
stored in memory.  
(4) Press – (to decrease the effect)/ + (to increase the effect) to adjust the effect.  
Items to adjust  
STILL  
The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving  
picture  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
The interval of flash motion  
The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be swapped  
with a moving picture  
TRAIL  
The vanishing time of the incidental image  
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the  
shutter speed.  
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
2
4
DIG EFFT  
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG  
OFF  
OK  
OK  
EFFT  
SLOW  
SHTR MOVIE  
OLD  
LUMI.  
STILL  
FLASH LUMI.  
TRAIL  
+
[a ]  
[a ] The bar appears when setting following digital effect modes: STILL,  
FLASH, LUMI., TRAIL.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Notes  
• While using digital effect, you cannot use the following functions:  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Fader  
• PROGRAM AE does not work in the SLOW SHTR mode.  
• The following functions do not work in the OLD MOVIE mode:  
– Wide mode  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
When recording in the SLOW SHTR mode  
Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed number  
SLOW SHTR 1  
Shutter speed  
1/ 30  
1/ 15  
1/ 8  
SLOW SHTR 2  
SLOW SHTR 3  
SLOW SHTR 4  
1/ 4  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g PROGRAM AE  
SPOTLIGHT1)  
This mode prevents peoples faces, for example, from appearing excessively white  
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.  
PORTRAIT (soft portrait)  
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as  
people or flowers.  
SPORTS (sports lesson)1)  
This mode minimizes shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.  
BEACH&SKI1)  
This mode prevents peoples faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,  
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.  
SUNSETMOON (sunset & moon)2)  
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general  
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.  
LANDSCAPE2)  
This mode is for when you record distant subjects such as mountains. Also it prevents  
your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you record a  
subject behind glass or a screen.  
1) Your camcorder focuses only on subjects in the middle to far distance.  
2) Your camcorder focuses only distant subject.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g PROGRAM AE  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select PROGRAM AE in  
, then press EXEC (p. 173).  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE AUTO  
P
EFFECT  
SPOTLIGHT  
PORTRAIT  
RED EYE  
R
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
SPORTS  
BEACH&SKI  
SUNSETMOON  
LANDSCAPE  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l PROGRAM AE  
Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings.  
Notes  
• The following functions do not work in PROGRAM AE:  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– During fading in with BOUNCE  
– SLOW SHTR  
– OLD MOVIE  
– Spot Focus  
• PROGRAM AE does not work in the following cases (The indicator flashes):  
NightShot  
– When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY, you use MEMORY MIX.  
• When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY, the SPORTS mode does not work.  
(The indicator flashes.)  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly  
We recommend adjusting the exposure manually in the following cases:  
– When the subject is backlit  
– When the subject is too bright against the background  
– When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press EXPOSURE. The screen to adjust the exposure appears.  
(3) Press MANUAL.  
(4) Adjust the exposure using – (to dim)/ + (to brighten).  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
4
EXPO–  
AUTO  
OK  
AUTO  
OK  
SURE  
MANU–  
AL  
MANU–  
AL  
EXPOSURE  
EXPOSURE  
+
+
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re  
Press  
AUTO to return to PAGE1.  
Note  
When you adjust the exposure manually, the following functions do not work:  
– Back light function  
– Color Slow Shutter  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g sp o t lig h t -m e t e rin g fu n ct io n  
– Fle xib le Sp o t Me t e r  
You can take a picture with the appropriate exposure automatically for just the point  
you want to focus on and with its exposure fixed.  
Use Flexible Spot Meter in the following cases:  
– The subject is backlit.  
– When there is strong contrast between the subject and background such as with a  
subject that is on stage and lit by a spotlight.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press SPOT METER. The SPOT METER screen appears.  
(3) Press the desired area in the frame.  
The SPOT METER indicator flashes on the screen. The exposure of the point  
you selected is adjusted.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
SPOT  
SPOT METER  
METER  
AUTO  
OK  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re  
Press  
AUTO to return to PAGE1.  
Note  
The following functions do not work during Flexible Spot Meter:  
– Back light function  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Spot Focus  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases.  
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.  
When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY, you can adjust the focus manually with  
the image enlarged to twice the size (Expanded focus).  
• The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting:  
– Subjects through glass coated with water droplets  
Horizontal stripes  
– Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls or the sky  
• When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in  
the background  
• Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
(1) Press FOCUS.  
The 9 (focus) indicator appears on the screen.  
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.  
2
Focus ring  
FOCUS  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s  
Press FOCUS to turn off the 9,  
or  
indicator.  
Ab o u t e xp a n d e d fo cu s  
If you set EXPANDED F in  
switch is set to MEMORY, the  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 174) when the POWER  
(expanded focus) indicator appears when the focus  
ring is turned and the image will be enlarged to twice its size. The focal distance  
information is also displayed. Adjustment is complete, the image returns to its original  
size automatically.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
To focus precisely  
It is easier to focus on the subject if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the “W” (wide-  
angle) position after focusing at the “T” (telephoto) position.  
When you shoot close to the subject  
Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.  
9 changes as follow s:  
when recording a distant subject  
when the subject is too close to focus on  
Focal distance information is displayed for about three seconds on the LCD screen  
in the follow ing cases:  
– When switching the focus adjustment mode from autofocus to manual  
– When turning the focus ring  
Focal distance information  
You cannot get correct information if you have attached a conversion lens (optional) to  
your camcorder.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g sp o t fo cu s fu n ct io n – Sp o t Fo cu s  
You can take a picture with the appropriate focus automatically for just the point you  
want to focus on and with its focus fixed.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press SPOT FOCUS. The SPOT FOCUS screen appears.  
(3) Press the desired area in the frame.  
The SPOT FOCUS indicator flashes on the screen. The focus of the point you  
selected is adjusted.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
SPOT  
SPOT FOCUS  
FOCUS  
AUTO  
OK  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s  
Press  
AUTO to return to PAGE1.  
Note  
The back light function does not work during Spot Focus.  
Focal distance information  
It is not displayed on the screen.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In t e rva l Re co rd in g  
You can make a time-lapse recording by setting your camcorder to automatically record  
and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering,  
emergence, etc. with this function.  
Example  
1 s  
1 s  
9 min 59 s  
9 min 59 s  
[a ]  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[b ]  
10 min  
10 min  
[a ] REC TIME  
[b ] INTERVAL  
There may be a discrepancy in recording time of up to +/ – six frames from the selected  
time.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select INT. REC in  
, then press EXEC (p. 179).  
(4) Select SET, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select INTERVAL, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired interval time, then press EXEC.  
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN  
(7) Select REC TIME, then press EXEC.  
(8) Select a desired recording time, then press EXEC.  
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC  
(9) Press  
RET.  
(10) Set INT. REC to ON, then press EXEC.  
(11) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The INTERVAL TAPE indicator flashes on the screen.  
(12) Press START/ STOP to start Interval Recording.  
The INTERVAL TAPE indicator lights up during Interval Recording.  
4
5
7
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
EXIT  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
I NTERVAL  
REC TIME  
EXIT  
EXIT  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
1MIN  
5MIN  
10MIN  
0. 5SEC  
1SEC  
1. 5SEC  
2SEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To ca n ce l In t e rva l Re co rd in g  
Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g  
– Fra m e re co rd in g  
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.  
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make frame recording. We  
recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote  
Commander after step 6.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select FRAME REC in  
, then press EXEC (p. 179).  
EXIT  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDI O MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
I NT. REC  
OFF  
ON  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The FRAME REC indicator lights up.  
(6) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a  
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.  
(7) Move the subject, and repeat step 6.  
To ca n ce l fra m e re co rd in g  
Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
Note  
The proper remaining tape time is not indicated if you use frame recording  
continuously.  
When using frame recording  
The last recorded frame is longer than other frames.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g w it h a ll t h e p ixe ls  
– Pro g re ssive Re co rd in g Mo d e  
To import moving pictures to a computer to view still images, we recommend you  
record in Progressive Recording Mode. To use Progressive Recording Mode, follow the  
procedure below. Still images produced this way are more stable than those recorded in  
normal mode, and thus are more suitable for analyzing high-speed action such as sports  
scenes. (Since your camcorder takes in an image every 1/ 30 of a second in Progressive  
Recording Mode, moving pictures recorded in this mode may be subject to too much  
jitter. To view moving pictures, we recommend recording in normal mode.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press PRGRE REC.  
To ca n ce l Pro g re ssive Re co rd in g Mo d e  
Press PRGRE REC again.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
Note on Progressive Recording Mode  
The normal TV broadcast divides the screen into two finer fields and displays them in  
turns every 1/ 60 of a second. Thus, the actual image displayed in an instant covers only  
half of the apparent image area. Displaying the whole image simultaneously on a full  
screen is called displaying with all the pixels. In this function the picture is clearer than  
one in normal function, but moving objects appear jerky since the picture is read/  
output every about 1/ 30 second.  
When recording under fluorescent light  
When recording in Progressive Recording Mode under fluorescent light or light bulb, a  
rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly (Flicker  
phenomenon). This is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this phenomenon, cancel  
Progressive Recording Mode.  
When you record w ith Progressive Recording Mode  
The angle of view is slightly larger than normal recording.  
During Progressive Recording Mode, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Digital zoom  
– Recording still images on the “Memory Stick” during tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
– Wide mode  
– BOUNCE  
– SLOW SHTR  
– OLD MOVIE  
– SteadyShot  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e vie w fin d e r  
Turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with the LCD  
screen facing out. You can operate with the touch panel using the viewfinder.  
Use the viewfinder when operating camera brightness and fader on the touch panel.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with the  
LCD screen facing out.  
(2) Press  
OFF. The PANEL OFF indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press OK. The LCD screen is turned off.  
(4) Using the viewfinder, press the LCD screen. EXPOSURE,  
OK,  
ON and  
FADER (only when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA) appear.  
(5) Press the LCD screen and select a desired item, then press  
OK.  
EXPOSURE: Adjust the exposure by pressing –/ +.  
FADER:  
Press FADER until a desired fader mode appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE  
(no indicator) T DOT  
T
WIPE  
T
OVERLAP  
ON:  
The LCD screen lights up.  
When the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA  
View finder  
4
EXPO–  
SURE  
OK  
ON  
FADER  
When the POWER  
switch is set to MEMORY  
EXPO–  
SURE  
OK  
ON  
To m a ke t h e b u t t o n s o n t h e LCD scre e n d isa p p e a r  
Press  
OK.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g t h e vie w fin d e r  
Note  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR or during memory playback, you cannot  
operate with the touch panel using the viewfinder.  
To operate the items that do not appear  
Set the LCD panel back to the previous position. Operate the items using the LCD  
screen.  
Available recording time  
This is the time when you record pictures using the viewfinder (p. 17).  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e w it h p ict u re e ffe ct  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During playback or playback pause, press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select P EFFECT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 173).  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
P
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
You can use NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.  
See page 53 for details of each mode.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
Notes  
• You cannot process externally input scenes using picture effect.  
• You cannot record images on the tape on your camcorder while you are processing  
the image using picture effect. Record images on the “Memory Stick” (p. 114, 123), or  
on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed by picture effect  
Pictures processed by picture effect are not output through the DV Interface.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a digital effect is displayed.  
(3) Select a desired mode. You can use STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL. See  
page 54 for details of the each mode.  
When you select STILL or LUMI., the picture that you select the mode to is  
stored in memory as a still image.  
(4) Press –/ + to adjust the effect.  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
2
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG  
OK  
EFFT  
STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Notes  
• You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect.  
• You cannot record images on the tape on your camcorder while you are processing  
the image using digital effect. Record images on the “Memory Stick” (p. 114, 123), or  
on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed by digital effect  
Pictures processed by digital effect are not output through the DV Interface.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e  
Ta p e PB ZOOM  
Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded  
on the “Memory Stick” (p. 133).  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.  
(3) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame.  
The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback  
image is enlarged to about twice the size. If you then press another area, that  
area moves to the center of the screen.  
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can select the zoom ratio from approximately 1.1 times up to 5 times its  
size.  
W : Decrease the zoom ratio.  
T : Increase the zoom ratio.  
2
PB ZOOM  
PB  
ZOOM  
END  
Pow er zoom lever  
To ca n ce l t a p e PB ZOOM  
Press  
END.  
Notes  
• You cannot process externally input scenes using tape PB ZOOM with your  
camcorder.  
• You cannot record images on the tape on your camcorder while you are processing  
the image using tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images on the “Memory  
Stick” (p. 114), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
• You cannot record moving pictures on the “Memory Stick” on your camcorder when  
you have processed the picture using tape PB ZOOM.  
Images in tape PB ZOOM  
Images in tape PB ZOOM are not output through the DV Interface.  
In tape PB ZOOM  
If you press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen disappears.  
You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.  
Edge of the enlarged image  
The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e  
– Ze ro se t m e m o ry  
Your camcorder automatically searches for a desired scene having the tape counter  
value of “0:00:00.” Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) During playback, press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at  
the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows “0:00:00,” then starts  
counting. If the indicators do not appear, press DISPLAY. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes.  
(2) Press x when you want to stop playback.  
(3) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counters zero point. The tape stops  
automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero.  
(4) Press N. Playback starts from the counters zero point.  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
DISPLAY  
N
m
x
Notes  
• When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory  
function will be canceled.  
• There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the time code and the tape  
counter.  
• The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears when you press FN.  
If the tape has a blank portion in the recorded portions  
The zero set memory function may not work correctly.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se a rch in g t h e b o u n d a rie s o f re co rd e d  
t a p e b y t it le Tit le se a rch  
Use the cassette with Cassette Memory for this operation.  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the TITLE  
SEARCH indicator appears.  
The title search screen appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t (no indicator)  
(2) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that  
you selected.  
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
TITLE SEARCH  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
NIGHT  
BASEBALL  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To ca n ce l se a rch in g  
Press x on the Remote Commander.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
Title search may not work correctly.  
To superimpose a title  
See page 95.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e  
– Da t e se a rch  
• DATE SEARCH by using Cassette Memory  
c Cue by selecting the recording date on the screen  
• DATE SEARCH without using Cassette Memory  
c Cue to changing point of recording date  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e b y u sin g Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
Before operation  
• You can use this function only when playing back the cassette with Cassette Memory.  
• Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears.  
The date search screen appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t (no indicator)  
(2) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected  
date.  
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
DATE SEARCH  
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 03  
SEP / 6 / 03  
DEC / 24 / 03  
JAN / 1 / 04  
FEB / 11 / 04  
APR / 29 / 04  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To ca n ce l se a rch in g  
Press x on the Remote Commander.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e – Da t e se a rch  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e w it h o u t u sin g Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select CM SEARCH in  
, then press EXEC (p. 178).  
CM SET  
TITLE  
EXIT  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH ON  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
OFF  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select OFF, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander, until the DATE SEARCH  
indicator appears.  
(6) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press  
> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder  
automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time  
you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.  
To ca n ce l se a rch in g  
Press x on the Remote Commander or  
on your camcorder.  
Note  
If one days recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find  
the point where the recording date changes.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
Date search may not work correctly.  
Cassette Memory  
The cassette with Cassette Memory can hold six recording date data. If you search the  
date among seven or more data, see “Searching for the date without using Cassette  
Memory.”  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Ed it in g —  
Du b b in g t a p e  
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as  
a player.  
You can connect either the A/ V connecting cable (supplied) or i.LINK cable (optional).  
If you connect with the i.LINK cable (optional), video and audio signals are transmitted  
in digital form for high-quality editing.  
Titles, screen indicators, Cassette Memory contents, and “Memory Stick” index screen  
lettering cannot be recorded.  
Co n n e ct in g t o t h e VCR  
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:  
8 mm , Hi8 , Digital8 , VHS , S-VHS , VHSC  
Betamax , ED Betamax , mini DV , DV or MICROMV  
, S-VHSC  
,
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
Yellow  
White  
IN  
S VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
Red  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
i.LINK  
DV Interface  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
: Signal flow  
76  
Du b b in g t a p e  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Before operation for connecting w ith the A/V connecting cable  
• Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
• Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be  
superimposed on the edited tape:  
On your camcorder:  
DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO, DATA CODE  
On the Remote Commander:  
DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Insert the blank tape (or the tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and  
insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording. If the VCR has an input selector, set it to input  
mode.  
Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.  
(3) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(4) Start recording on the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g t h e t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
See page 43 for details.  
About i.LINK  
See page 199 for details.  
Pictures processed by picture effect, digital effect or PB ZOOM  
These are not output through the DV Interface.  
If you record a paused playback picture  
• The recorded picture becomes rough with the DV Interface.  
• The picture may jitter when you play back the picture using other video equipment.  
If you connect w ith the i.LINK cable  
Recording of only the picture or sound cannot be done.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s  
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto the tape without  
operating the VCR.  
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.  
Your camcorder can dub on the “Memory Stick.” See page 125 for details.  
Unwanted  
scene  
Unwanted  
scene  
Switch the order  
Be fo re o p e ra t in g Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t h e t a p e re co rd e d  
o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
Step 1 Connecting to the VCR (p. 78).  
Step 2 Setting the VCR to operate (p. 79).  
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 82).  
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip step 2 and 3.  
Usin g Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t h e t a p e re co rd e d o n o t h e r  
e q u ip m e n t  
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 84).  
Operation 2 Performing Digital program editing (Dubbing the tape) (p. 86).  
Note  
When editing digital video, the operation signals to the VCR cannot be sent with  
LANC jack.  
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t o t h e VCR  
You can connect either the A/ V connecting cable or the i.LINK cable.  
Connect the devices as illustrated on page 76.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e  
To connect using the A/ V connecting cable, send the control signal by infrared rays to  
the remote sensor on the VCR.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Turn the power of the connected VCR on.  
If the VCR has an input selector, set it to input mode.  
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/  
VTR.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 182).  
(5) Select TAPE, then press EXEC.  
(6) Press EDIT SET.  
(7) Select CONTROL, then press EXEC.  
(8) When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, select IR, then press EXEC.  
When connecting with the i.LINK cable, select i.LINK, press EXEC, then go  
to “Step 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR” on page 82.  
(9) Select IR SETUP, then press EXEC.  
(10)Select the IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press EXEC. Check the code in  
“About the IR SETUP code” (p. 81).  
4
7
5
9
6
EXIT  
END  
V I DEO ED IT  
0:32:30:14  
UNDO  
OTHERS  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
IR  
MARK START  
IN  
ED I T  
SET  
COMMANDER  
DISPL AY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0:00:00:00  
SCENE  
0
END  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
IR  
i. LINK  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
3
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
(11) Select PAUSEMODE, then press EXEC.  
(12) Select the mode to cancel recording pause on the VCR, then press EXEC.  
The correct button depends on your VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
11  
12  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE REC  
IR TEST  
PB  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
IR TEST  
PAUSE  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
(13) Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the  
remote sensor of the VCR about 30 cm (12 in.) apart.  
VCR  
Remote sensor  
Infrared rays emitter  
(14) Insert the recordable tape into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording  
pause.  
(15) Select IR TEST, then press EXEC.  
(16) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC.  
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.  
The indicator you selected to cancel recording pause on the VCR flashes  
on the screen. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
15  
16  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
ENGAGE  
REC PAUSE  
PAUSEMODE RETURN  
IR TEST  
EXECUTE  
COMPLETE  
EXEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
RET.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
Note  
When you connect with an i.LINK cable, you may not be able to operate the dubbing  
function correctly, depending on the VCR.  
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.  
About the IR SETUP code  
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the  
correct code, depending on your VCR. Default setting is code number 3.  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
89  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
22, 23, 24, 28, 29  
23, 32, 80  
21, 33, 35  
77, 78  
Sony  
Mitsubishi/ MGA  
Multitech  
NEC  
Admiral (M. Wards)  
Aiwa  
47, 54, 80  
49, 51  
Akai  
Olympic  
Optimus  
Orion  
Audio Dynamic  
21, 35  
22  
Bell&Howell  
(M. Wards)  
36  
60  
Panasonic  
Pentax  
16, 17, 77, 78  
8, 42  
Broksonic  
Canon  
21, 70, 82  
77, 78  
Philco  
26, 70, 77, 78  
47, 77, 78, 83  
78  
Citizen  
47  
Philips  
Craig  
47, 73  
Pioneer  
Curtis Mathis  
Daewoo  
DBX  
8, 77, 80  
Quasar  
6, 16, 17, 77, 78  
26, 40, 77  
RCA/ PROSCAN  
7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 78*,  
83, 101  
21, 33, 35  
Dimensia  
Emerson  
Fisher  
8
Realistic  
Sansui  
22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88  
26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82  
21  
36, 37, 44, 45  
Singer  
73  
Funai  
80  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*  
General Electric  
Goldstar/ LG  
GO VIDEO  
Hitachi  
8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101  
26, 36, 37, 47  
47  
Scott  
22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41  
71  
Sharp  
88, 89  
8, 42, 78  
Shintom  
Signature 2000  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tashiro  
Tatung  
Teac  
73  
HQ  
40  
80, 89  
Instant Replay  
JC Penny  
JVC  
77, 78  
77, 78, 80, 83  
80  
8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77  
12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 47  
36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80  
17, 77, 78, 83  
21, 33, 35  
47  
Kenwood  
LXI (Sears)  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Marta  
21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 80  
77, 78  
Technics  
Toshiba  
Wards  
7, 40, 49  
37, 47, 88, 89, 95  
21, 33, 35, 36  
95  
47  
Memorex  
Minolta  
37, 77  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
8, 42  
* TV/ VCR component  
Note on the IR SETUP code  
Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
When the VCR does not operate correctly  
• After checking the code in “About the IR SETUP code” (p. 81), set the IR SETUP or the  
PAUSEMODE again.  
• Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.  
• Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR  
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR.  
Prepare a pen and paper for notes.  
Before operation, eject the cassette from your camcorder (if inserted).  
(1) Insert the recordable cassette into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording  
pause.  
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, the recording pause is not necessary.  
(2) Select ADJ TEST, then press EXEC.  
(3) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC.  
IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the  
number values for adjusting the synchronization.  
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen. When finished, the  
indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.  
Five IN numbers and corresponding OUT numbers are displayed.  
Take a note of the opening number value of each IN and the closing number  
value of each OUT.  
(5) Calculate the average of five opening number values of five IN, and the  
average of all the closing number values of each OUT.  
(6) Select ”CUT-IN,” then press EXEC.  
(7) Select the average number value of IN, then press EXEC.  
The calculated start position for recording is set.  
(8) Select ”CUT-OUT,” then press EXEC.  
(9) Select the average number value of OUT, then press EXEC.  
The calculated stop position for recording is set.  
(10) Press  
RET. to execute.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
2
6
3
8
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
COMPLETE  
EXECUTE  
ENGAGE  
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE  
IR TEST  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0
0
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE1, then press EXIT.  
Notes  
• When you complete step 3, the image to adjust the synchronization is recorded for  
about 50 seconds.  
• If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the  
tape may not be recorded properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before  
starting the recording.  
• When the recording unit cannot be operated properly by the i.LINK cable, leave the  
connection as it is, and make the A/ V connecting cable settings (p. 79). Video and  
audio are sent by digital signals.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a Pro g ra m  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert the cassette for playback into your camcorder, and insert the tape for  
recording into the VCR.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 182).  
(5) Select TAPE, then press EXEC.  
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
control buttons on the screen, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one  
frame at a time with  
/
.
(7) Press MARK IN on the screen or MARK on the Remote Commander.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the upper part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video control  
buttons on the screen, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one frame at  
a time with  
/
.
(9) Press MARK OUT on the screen or MARK on the Remote Commander.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the lower part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(10) Repeat step 6 to 9.  
When one program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set 20 programs in maximum.  
4
9
5
7
EXIT  
V I DEO ED I T  
V I DEO ED I T  
0:32:30:14  
UNDO  
0:08:55:06  
ED I T  
UNDO  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
MARK START ED I T  
IN  
MARK START  
OUT  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT  
SET  
SET  
RETURN  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0:00:00:00  
TOTAL 0:00:00:00  
SCENE  
0
SCENE  
0
END  
END  
EXEC  
RET.  
10  
V I DEO ED I T  
V I DEO ED I T  
0:09:07:06  
UNDO  
0:10:01:23  
UNDO  
ED I T  
SET  
ED I T  
SET  
MARK START  
I N  
MARK START  
I N  
TOTAL 0:00:13:00  
TOTAL 0:00:47:12  
SCENE  
1
SCENE  
3
END  
END  
To fin ish m a kin g p ro g ra m s  
Press  
END.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
Note  
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing.  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT.  
If there is a blank portion betw een the IN point and the OUT point on the tape  
The total time may not be displayed correctly.  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT mark first, and then IN mark of the last set program.  
(1) Press UNDO.  
(2) Press ERASE 1 MARK. The last set program mark flashes, then the DELETE ?  
indicator appears.  
(3) Press EXEC. The last set program is deleted.  
To cancel erasing  
Press CANCEL in step 3.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Follow the step 2 to 5 on page 84.  
(2) Press UNDO.  
(3) Press ERASE ALL. All the set program marks flash, then the DELETE ?  
indicator appears.  
(4) Press EXEC. All the set programs are deleted.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Press CANCEL in step 4.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e )  
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
(Du b b in g t h e t a p e )  
(1) When you use a digital video camera recorder, set the power switch of VCR to  
VCR/ VTR.  
(2) Make sure your camcorder and the VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set  
to recording pause.  
When you use an i.LINK cable the following procedure is not necessary.  
(3) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(4) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(5) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 182).  
(6) Select TAPE, then press EXEC.  
(7) Press START.  
(8) Press EXEC.  
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during searching, and the EDITING indicator  
appears during editing on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after the dubbing is complete.  
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.  
To ca n ce l d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press CANCEL.  
To e n d Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is complete. Then the display returns to  
VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press  
END to end the video edit function.  
You cannot record on the VCR in the follow ing  
Indicator  
Cause  
No indicator  
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.  
• The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is  
selected.)  
• The button to cancel recording pause is not  
correct. (When IR is selected.)  
CHECK ”i.LINK” & REC STATUS • i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable is not  
connected.  
• The power of the connected VCR is not turned  
on. (When i.LINK is selected.)  
When the program has not been set  
You cannot press START.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
You can record the tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/  
audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder. You can connect either the A/ V  
connecting cable (supplied) or i.LINK cable (optional).  
If you connect with the i.LINK cable (optional), video and audio signals are transmitted  
in digital form for high-quality editing.  
Co n n e ct in g t o t h e VCR o r t h e TV  
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
TV  
Yellow  
OUT  
White  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Red  
: Signal flow  
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
DV Interface  
i.LINK  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
: Signal flow  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Before operation for connecting w ith the A/V connecting cable  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings when using the A/ V connecting cable.  
(The default setting is LCD.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert the blank tape (or the tape you want to record over) into your  
camcorder. If you are recording the tape from the VCR, insert the recorded  
tape into the VCR.  
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(3) Press REC CTRL.  
REC CTRL  
RET.  
REC  
PAUSE  
REC  
START  
(4) Press REC PAUSE.  
(5) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record the tape from a VCR.  
Select a TV program if you record from a TV. The picture from playback side  
appears on the screen.  
(6) Press REC START at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g t h e t a p e  
Press x on your camcorder, and then press the stop button on the VCR.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In step 2 to 4, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In  
step 6, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Note on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,  
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with  
black paper.  
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
See page 43 for details.  
When using the i.LINK cable  
• Before recording, make sure if the DV IN indicator appears on the screen. The DV IN  
indicator may appear on both equipment.  
• Recording of only the picture or sound cannot be done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR  
– In se rt e d it in g  
You can insert a new scene with sound from a VCR onto the originally recorded tape by  
specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this  
operation.  
Connections are the same as on page 87. Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to  
insert into the VCR.  
[a ]  
[A]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[B]  
[C]  
[A] The tape that contains the scene to be superimposed  
[B] The tape before editing  
[C] The tape after editing  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) On the VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then set the VCR to  
playback pause.  
(2) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c], then set it to playback  
pause.  
(3) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in memory.  
The tape counter shows “0:00:00.”  
(4) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ].  
(5) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(6) Press REC CTRL.  
(7) Press REC PAUSE.  
(8) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press REC START on your  
camcorder to start inserting the new scene with sound.  
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your  
camcorder automatically stops recording. The zero set memory function will be  
canceled.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR – In se rt e d it in g  
0:00:00  
3
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander again after step 4 to erase the  
ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from step 2.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In step 5 to 7, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In  
step 8, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point  
Skip step 2 and 3. Press x on the Remote Commander or  
on your camcorder when  
you want to stop inserting.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Au d io d u b b in g  
You can record additional audio to the original sound on the tape by connecting audio  
equipment or a microphone. If you connect the audio equipment, you can add sound to  
the tape already recorded in the 12-bit mode by specifying starting and ending points.  
The original sound will not be erased.  
Pre p a rin g fo r a u d io d u b b in g  
You can record additional audio in the following:  
• Dubbing with the built-in microphone  
• Connecting the microphone (optional) to the MIC jack  
• Connecting the microphone (optional) to the intelligent accessory shoe  
• Connecting the A/ V connecting cable to the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order:  
• MIC jack  
• Intelligent accessory shoe  
• AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
• Built-in microphone  
Du b b in g w it h t h e b u ilt -in m icro p h o n e  
No connection is necessary.  
If no external microphone (optional) is connected, sound is recorded via the built-in  
microphone.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e (o p t io n a l) t o t h e MIC ja ck  
MIC (PLUG IN  
POWER) jack  
Microphone (optional)  
: Signal flow  
You can check the recorded picture and sound by connecting the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
to a TV.  
The recorded sound is not output from a speaker. Check the sound by using the  
headphones or TV.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e (o p t io n a l) t o t h e in t e llig e n t  
a cce sso ry sh o e  
Install the Microphone after removing the shoe cover.  
Shoe cover  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
Microphone (optional)  
Co n n e ct in g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le t o t h e AUDIO/VIDEO ja ck  
Audio equipment  
LINE OUT  
AUDIO L  
AUDIO R  
L
R
White  
Red  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
Do not connect the  
video (yellow) plug.  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Note  
When dubbing with the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are  
not output through the S VIDEO jack or AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Check the recorded  
picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Ad d in g a n a u d io so u n d o n t h e re co rd e d t a p e  
Choose a connection mentioned on page 91, and connect audio equipment or  
microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below using the touch panel  
or the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Locate the recording start point. Press to start playing back. To pause  
at the recording start point. You can fine-adjust the  
playing back, press  
recording start point by pressing  
(3) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(4) Press A DUB CTRL.  
/
.
The A DUB CTRL screen appears.  
A
DUB CTRL  
RET.  
AUDIO  
DUB  
(5) Press AUDIO DUB. The green  
(6) Press on your camcorder and at the same time start playing back the  
audio you want to record.  
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While recording  
new sound, the red indicator appears on the screen.  
(7) Press on your camcorder at the point where you want to stop recording.  
X indicator appears on the screen.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Follow the step 1 and 2 in “Using the touch panel.”  
(2) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote Commander.  
The green  
X indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press X on the Remote Commander and at the same time start playing back  
the audio you want to record.  
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While recording  
new sound, the red  
indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press x on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop  
recording.  
N
X
AUDIO DUB  
93  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Au d io d u b b in g  
You cannot audio dubbing in the follow ing cases:  
• The tape recorded in the 16-bit mode  
• The tape recorded in the LP mode  
• Connecting with the DV Interface  
• The blank portions of the tape  
• The cassette set the write-protect tab to lock  
To add new sound more precisely  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point where you want to stop recording later during  
playback.  
Follow the step 2 in “Using the touch panel.” Recording automatically stops at the point  
where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed.  
We recommend that you add new sound on the tape recorded w ith your  
camcorder  
If you add new sound on the tape recorded with another camcorder (including other  
DCR-TRV75/ TRV80), the sound quality may become worse.  
Mo n it o rin g t h e n e w re co rd e d so u n d  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select AUDIO MIX in  
, then press EXEC (p. 175).  
EXIT  
VCR SET  
H i F i SOUND  
AUDIO MIX  
A
/
VcDV OUT ST1  
ST2  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(5) Press r/ R to adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new  
sound (ST2), then press EXEC.  
About five minutes after you disconnect the power source or remove the  
battery pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1)  
only. The default setting is original sound only.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le o n a ca sse t t e w it h  
Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
VACATION  
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, if one title consists of five characters.  
However, if the Cassette Memory is full with date and cassette label data, one cassette  
can have only up to about 11 titles with five characters each.  
Cassette Memory capacity is as follows:  
– Six date data (maximum)  
– One cassette label (maximum)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Insert the cassette with Cassette Memory.  
(2) During standby, recording, playback or playback pause, press FN to display  
PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select TITLE in  
, then press EXEC (p. 178).  
(5) Select , then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired title, then press EXEC. The title appears on the screen.  
(7) If necessary, change the color, size, or position by pressing COLOR, SIZE,  
POS r or POS R.  
(8) Press TITLE OK.  
(9) Press SAVE TITLE.  
During playback, playback pause or recording:  
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for about five seconds and  
the title is set.  
During recording standby:  
The TITLE indicator appears. And when you press START/ STOP to start  
recording, the TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for about five  
seconds and the title is set.  
5
6
EXIT  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
TITLE  
OK  
RET.  
EXIT  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
VACATION  
THE END  
VACATION  
COLOR  
SIZE  
POS r POS R  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le o n a ca sse t t e w it h Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
To use the custom title  
If you want to use the custom title, select  
in step 5.  
The titles superimposed w ith your camcorder  
• They appear only by DV  
format video equipment with index titler function.  
• The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when  
searching a recording with other video equipment.  
To not display title  
Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 178).  
Title setting  
• The title color changes as follows:  
WHITE t YELLOW t VIOLET t RED t CYAN t GREEN t BLUE  
• The title size changes as follows:  
SMALL y LARGE  
You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size.  
• The title position as follows:  
If you select the title size SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position.  
If you select the title size LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position.  
Era sin g a t it le  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select TITLEERASE in  
, then press EXEC (p. 178). The TITLE ERASE screen  
appears.  
(4) Select the title you want to erase, then press EXEC.  
The ERASE OK? indicator appears.  
(5) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, then press OK.  
The ERASING indicator flashes on the screen.  
When the title is erased, the COMPLETE indicator appears.  
3
4
T I TLE ERASE  
T I TLE ERASE  
PRESENT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!  
4
CONGRATULATIONS!  
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
ERASE OK?  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
OK  
CAN–  
CEL  
r
R
EXEC  
END  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l e ra sin g  
Press CANCEL in step 5.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each  
title can have up to 20 characters.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select TITLE in  
, then press EXEC (p. 178).  
(4) Select , then press EXEC.  
(5) Select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired character. Repeat pressing a key to select a desired character  
on the key.  
(7) Press c to move the cursor for the next character. Repeat the same procedure  
as step 6 and 7 to complete your title.  
(8) Press SET. The title is stored in memory.  
4
5
7
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
TITLE SET  
[
TITLE SET  
_______________  
____________________  
]
[
]
PARTY  
&?!  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
&?!  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
GH I  
J
KL  
MNO  
123 678  
GH I  
J
KL  
MNO  
123 678  
45  
90  
45  
90  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
SET  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
/–  
SET  
/
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d  
In step 5, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want  
to change, then press EXEC and enter the new title as desired.  
If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters during tape recording  
standby w ith the cassette inserted in your camcorder  
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in  
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then  
start again from step 1.  
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that  
your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.  
To erase the character  
Press C. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Press c.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e o n a ca sse t t e w it h  
Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The label can consist of up to 10 characters and are stored in Cassette Memory. When  
you insert the labeled cassette with the POWER switch set to CAMERA, or the POWER  
switch is set to VCR, the label is displayed for about five seconds.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Insert the cassette with Cassette Memory you want to label.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select TAPE TITLE in  
, then press EXEC (p. 178). The TAPE TITLE screen  
appears.  
(5) Select a desired character. Repeat pressing a key to select a desired character  
on the key.  
(6) Press c to move the cursor for the next character. Repeat the same procedure  
as step 5 and 6 to complete the label.  
(7) Press SET. The label is stored in memory.  
4
5
6
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
TAPE TITLE  
TAPE TITLE  
_________  
TAPE TITLE  
[
__________  
]
[
]
[
_____  
GRADU  
]
G
&?!  
GH I  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
&?!  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
&?!  
GH I  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
JKL  
MNO  
123 678  
45  
GH I  
J
KL  
MNO  
123 678  
45  
JKL  
MNO  
123 678  
45  
90  
90  
90  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
SET  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
SET  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
/–  
SET  
/
/
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To e ra se t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
Select C to erase the label in step 5, then press SET.  
To ch a n g e t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label.  
If you have superimposed titles in the cassette  
When the label appears, up to four titles also appear.  
To erase the character  
Press C. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Press c.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Era sin g a ll t h e d a t a in Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The following data saved in Cassette Memory can be completely erased once:  
– Date data  
– Title data  
– Cassette label  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select ERASE ALL in  
, then press EXEC (p. 178).  
(4) Select OK, then press EXEC.  
The OK indicator changes to EXECUTE.  
(5) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC. The ERASING indicator flashes on the  
screen. Once erasing is complete, the COMPLETE indicator appears.  
3
4
EXIT  
EXIT  
CM SET  
CM SET  
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
OK  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l e ra sin g  
Select RETURN in step 5, then press EXEC.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s —  
Usin g “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
The “Memory Stick” is a new light and small recording media which, despite of the  
size, can store greater data than a floppy disk.  
The “Memory Stick” can, in addition to recording images and easily playing back  
images you want to see, follow operations such as:  
– Copying images into the “Memory Stick” from the tape  
– Capturing images into the computer using the supplied USB cable  
– Allow image deletion, protection and writing (with a print mark).  
File fo rm a t  
Still image (JPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses and records image data in JPEG (Joint Photographic  
Experts Group) format. The file extension is .jpg.  
Exif *Ver.2.2 JPEG compliant, DPOF compatible.  
*Exif: Exif is a file format for still images, established by the Japan Electronics and  
Information Technology Industries Association(JEITA). Files in this format can have  
additional information such as your camcorders setting information at the time of  
recording.  
Moving picture (MPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses and records picture data in MPEG (Moving Picture Expert  
Group) format. The file extension is .mpg.  
Typical image data file name  
Still image  
101-0001:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
DSC00001.JPG: This file name appears on the display of a computer.  
Moving picture  
MOV00001:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
MOV00001.MPG: This file name appears on the display of a computer.  
To p re ve n t fro m e ra sin g im a g e s a ccid e n t a lly  
Rear part of the “Memory Stick”  
Slide the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” to LOCK.  
The position and shape of the write-protect tab may be different depending on the  
model.  
Some kinds of “Memory Stick” have no write-protect tab.  
Terminal  
Write-protect tab  
No t e s o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Labeling position  
Stick its label on the labeling position.  
Labeling position  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Image data may be damaged in the follow ing cases. Damaging image data is not  
guaranteed  
– If you eject the “Memory Stick” or turn off your camcorder while reading the image  
file from the “Memory Stick” or recording data onto the “Memory Stick” (while the  
access lamp is lit or flashing).  
– If you use the “Memory Stick” near magnets or magnetic fields such as those of  
speakers and TV.  
We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of a computer.  
On handling  
• When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in its case.  
• Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts  
of the connecting section.  
• Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not let the “Memory Stick” get wet.  
On location for use  
Do not use or keep the “Memory Stick” in locations that are:  
– Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun  
– Under direct sunlight  
– Very humid or subject to corrosive gases  
Th e Me m o ry St ick” fo rm a t t e d b y a co m p u t e r  
The “Memory Stick” formatted by Windows OS or Macintosh computers does not have  
a guaranteed compatibility with your camcorder.  
No t e o n t h e “ Ma g icGa t e Me m o ry St ick”  
You can use the “MagicGate Memory Stick” for recording image data on your  
camcorder. However, you cannot record or play back the music protected by copyright  
signals on your camcorder.  
No t e s o n u sin g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick Du o ”  
• Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the “Memory Stick Duo” Adaptor  
when using the “Memory Stick Duo” with your camcorder.  
• Verify that the insert direction of the “Memory Stick Duo.” The use of wrong direction  
may cause a malfunction.  
• Do not insert the “Memory Stick Duo” not inserted into the “Memory Stick Duo”  
Adaptor into the “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may cause a malfunction of  
the unit.  
No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y  
• Image data files recorded on the “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform with the  
Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA  
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).  
On your camcorder, you cannot play back still images recorded on other equipment  
(DCR-TRV890E/ TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform to this  
universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)  
• If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it  
with your camcorder (p. 177). Note that formatting erases all information on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
• Some playback devices may not be able to play back images recorded with your  
camcorder.  
• You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:  
– When playing back image data modified on a computer  
101  
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
• The “Memory Stick,”  
Corporation.  
and “MagicGate Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony  
• “Memory Stick Duo” and  
• “MagicGate” and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.  
In se rt in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the B  
mark facing as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
Eje ct in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Press the “Memory Stick” once lightly.  
Notes  
• If you insert the “Memory Stick” forcibly in the opposite direction, the “Memory  
Stick” slot may be damaged.  
• Do not insert anything other than the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot.  
This may cause a malfunction.  
While the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or strike your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data from  
the “Memory Stick” or recording the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the  
power off , eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data  
breakdown may occur.  
If “  
MEMORY STICK ERRORappears  
Reinsert the “Memory Stick” a few times. The “Memory Stick” may be damaged if the  
indicator still appears. If this occurs, use another “Memory Stick.”  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e  
d a t a  
Se le ct in g st ill im a g e q u a lit y  
The default setting is FINE.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select STILL SET in  
, then press EXEC (p. 176).  
(4) Select QUALITY, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired image quality, then press EXEC.  
3
4
EXIT  
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
BURST  
STILL SET  
BURST  
OFF  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
QUALITY  
FINE  
IMAGESIZE STANDARD  
REMAIN  
12  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
Setting  
FINE (FINE)  
Meaning  
Use this mode when you want to record high quality  
images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/ 4.  
STANDARD (STD) This is the standard image quality. Standard images  
compressed to about 1/ 10.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e d a t a  
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e size  
You can select image size 1600 × 1200 or 640 × 480 (When the POWER switch is set to  
CAMERA or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.).  
The default setting is 1600 × 1200.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select STILL SET in  
, then press EXEC (p. 176).  
(4) Select IMAGESIZE, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired image size, then press EXEC.  
The indicator changes as follow:  
1600  
640  
3
4
MEM SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
1
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
1600  
EXIT  
STILL SET  
BURST  
OFF  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE 1600 × 1200  
640 × 480  
REMAIN  
12  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
Me m o ry ca p a cit y o f st ill im a g e s  
Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The  
memory capacity of still images varies depending on the selected image quality mode  
and image size. Details are shown in the table below.  
1600 × 1200 image size  
Image quality  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 960 KB  
About 420 KB  
STANDARD  
640 × 480 image size  
Image quality  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 150 KB  
About 60 KB  
STANDARD  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e d a t a  
Se le ct in g t h e m o vin g p ict u re size  
You can select picture size 320 × 240 or 160 × 112.  
The default setting is 320 × 240.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select MOVIE SET in  
, then press EXEC (p. 176).  
(4) Select IMAGESIZE, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired image size, then press EXEC.  
The indicator changes as follow:  
320  
160  
3
4
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
MEM SET  
1
EXIT  
320  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE  
REMAIN  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE  
REMAIN  
320 240  
320 240  
160 112  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
30sec  
RET.  
30sec  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e d a t a  
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s a n d t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s  
t h a t ca n b e re co rd e d o n o n e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
The number of still images and the time of moving pictures you can record vary  
depending on which image quality mode you select and the complexity of the subject.  
St ill im a g e s  
(Unit: Image)  
FINE  
STANDARD  
Type of  
“Memory Stick”  
1600 × 1200  
640 × 480  
1600 × 1200  
640 × 480  
1600  
8
640  
50  
1600  
18  
640  
120  
8MB (supplied)  
16MB (optional)  
32MB (optional)  
64MB (optional)  
128MB (optional)  
16  
96  
37  
240  
32  
190  
390  
780  
75  
485  
65  
150  
300  
980  
130  
1970  
Mo vin g p ict u re s  
Image size  
Type of  
“Memory Stick”  
320 × 240  
160 × 112  
320  
160  
8MB (supplied)  
16MB (optional)  
32MB (optional)  
64MB (optional)  
128MB (optional)  
1 min. 20 sec.  
2 min. 40 sec.  
5 min. 20 sec.  
10 min. 40 sec.  
21 min. 20 sec.  
5 min. 20 sec.  
10 min. 40 sec.  
21 min. 20 sec.  
42 min. 40 sec.  
1 hr 25 min. 20 sec.  
The table shows approximate number of still images and time of moving pictures that  
can be recorded on the “Memory Stick” formatted with your camcorder.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry  
St ick” – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly and check the image. The green z indicator  
stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and the focus are  
adjusted and fixed while your camcorder targets at the middle of the image.  
Recording does not start yet.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO deeply will be  
recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
[a ]  
FINE  
640  
/ 12  
1
2
101  
[b]  
FINE  
640  
101  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
[a ] Approximate number of images can be recorded on the “Memory Stick”  
[b ] Folder name to be recorded  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images on the “Memory Stick” during tape recording or tape  
recording standby  
See page 44 for details.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
– Digital zoom  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Wide mode  
– Fader  
– Picture effect  
– Digital effect  
– SPORTS of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
– Title  
– SteadyShot  
During saving a still image data  
You cannot turn off the power or press PHOTO.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
When you press PHOTO lightly in step 1  
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) do not appear during  
recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the “Memory Stick.” To  
display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation (p. 38).  
If you record still images w hen the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
You can record still images continuously. Before recording, select a desired mode  
described below in the menu settings.  
NORMAL [a ] (  
)
Your camcorder shoots up to four still images in 1600 × 1200 size or 25 still images in  
640 × 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals.  
HIGH SPEED [a ] (  
)
Your camcorder shoots up to 32 still images in 640 × 480 size at about 0.07 sec intervals.  
EXP BRKTG [b ] (  
)
Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different  
exposures.  
[a]  
[b]  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select STILL SET in , then press EXEC (p. 176).  
(4) Select BURST, then press EXEC.  
MEM SET  
1
EXIT  
STILL SET  
BURST  
QUALITY  
OFF  
NORMAL  
IMAGESIZE HIGH SPEED  
EXP BRKTG  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(5) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
(6) Press EXIT to make the menu display disappear.  
(7) Press PHOTO deeply.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
The number of still images in continuous shooting  
The number of still images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image  
size and the capacity of the “Memory Stick.”  
During continuous recording of images  
The flash does not work.  
When shooting w ith the self-timer or the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum number of still images.  
When selecting HIGH SPEED  
Flickering or changes in color may occur.  
If remaining capacity on the “Memory Stick” is less than for three images  
EXP BRKTG does not work. “  
FULL” appears when you press PHOTO.  
The effect of EXP BRKTG  
The effect of EXP BRKTG may not be noticeable on the screen.  
We recommend viewing images on TV or the computer to recognize the effect.  
When selecting NORMAL or HIGH SPEED  
Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images during pressing  
PHOTO deeply.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
If you press PHOTO, the flash automatically pops up to strobe. The default setting is  
auto (no indicator). To change the flash mode, press (flash) repeatedly until the flash  
mode indicator appears on the screen. You cannot use this function during recording  
moving pictures.  
(flash)  
Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:  
t
t AUTO (No indicator)  
When you set RED EYE R in  
changes as follows:  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 173), the indicator  
t
t
Forced flash:  
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding  
brightness.  
Auto red-eye reduction:  
The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye.  
Forced red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce red-eye  
regardless of the surrounding brightness.  
No flash:  
The flash does not fire.  
The amount of flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can  
also change FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 173). Try  
recording various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
• Clean any dirt from the flash surface before use. With the heat from the flash firing,  
dirt can cause discoloration or stick to the flash surface so that the flash does not give  
off a sufficient amount of light.  
• The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 0.3 m to 2.5 m (31/ 32  
feet to 8 1/ 3 feet).  
• Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) causes lens shadow  
to appear.  
• You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.  
• Auto red-eye reduction ( ) and Forced red-eye reduction (  
) may not produce the  
desired effect depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, the  
subject not looking at the pre-recording flash or other conditions.  
• The flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright  
location.  
• The flash charge lamp flashes while the power for firing is being charged. After  
charging is complete, the flash charge lamp lights up.  
• When recording with the flash with the POWER switch set to CAMERA, it takes  
longer to prepare for image capture. This is because your camcorder starts to charge  
power for firing after the flash pops up.  
• If it is not easy to focus on a subject automatically, for example, when recording in the  
dark, use HOLOGRAM AF (p. 113) or the focal distance information (p. 62) for  
focusing manually.  
The flash does not fire even if you select auto and  
during the follow ing operations:  
NightShot  
(auto red-eye reduction)  
– SPOTLIGHT of PROGRAM AE  
– SUNSETMOON of PROGRAM AE  
– LANDSCAPE of PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
During recording images continuously  
The flash does not work.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Sh o o t in g w it h a n a u xilia ry lig h t – HOLOGRAM AF  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
The HOLOGRAM AF is an auxiliary light source used for focusing on subjects in dark  
places.  
Set HOLOGRAM F in  
to AUTO in the menu settings. (The default setting is AUTO.)  
When appears on the screen in a dark place, press PHOTO lightly. Then the  
auxiliary light will automatically emit until the subject is focused.  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter  
Ab o u t HOLOGRAM AF  
“HOLOGRAM AF (Auto-Focus),” an application of laser holograms, is a new AF  
optical system that enables still image shooting in dark places. Having gentler radiation  
than conventional high-brightness LEDs or lamps, the system satisfies Laser Class 1 (*)  
specification and thus maintains higher safety for human eyes.  
No safety problems will be caused by directly looking into the HOLOGRAM AF emitter  
at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience  
such effects like several minutes of image residual and dazzling, that you encounter  
after looking into a flashlight.  
* HOLOGRAM AF satisfies Class 1(time base 30,000 seconds), specified in all of JIS  
(Japan), IEC(EU), and FDA(US) industry standards.  
Complying with these standards identifies the laser product to be safe, under a  
condition that a human looks at the laser light either directly or even through a lens  
for 30,000 seconds.  
Notes  
• A conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the HOLOGRAM AF light and make  
focusing difficult.  
• If enough light does not reach the subject even if the HOLOGRAM AF emitter is  
emitted (recommended shooting distance is up to 2.5 m (8 1/ 3 feet)), the subject will  
not be focused.  
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit in the follow ing cases:  
– When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA  
NightShot  
– Flash is set to  
(no flash)  
– SUNSETMOON of PROGRAM AE  
– LANDSCAPE of PROGRAM AE  
– Manual focus  
– Spot Focus  
– Continuous photo recording  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m t a p e a s a st ill  
im a g e  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still  
image on the “Memory Stick.”  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
Before operation  
Insert the “Memory Stick” and the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press  
. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly and check the image. The picture from the tape  
freezes and the CAPTURE indicator appears on the screen. Recording does not  
start yet.  
To change the still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then  
press and hold PHOTO lightly.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeply. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator  
disappears. The image displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO  
deeply will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
FINE  
640  
12  
2
3
CAPTURE  
101  
1
FINE  
640  
101  
Sound recorded on the tape  
You cannot record audio from the tape.  
Title  
You cannot record the titles.  
Recording date/time  
The date/ time when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” is recorded. Various settings  
are not recorded.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m t a p e a s a st ill im a g e  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
You can use either A/ V connecting cable or i.LINK cable. Connect the devices as  
illustrated on page 87.  
When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, set DISPLAY in  
menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
to LCD in the  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see a desired program.  
The image of the other equipment is displayed on the LCD screen or in the  
viewfinder.  
(2) At the point where you want to record, follow the step 2 and 3 on page 114.  
Note  
If recording from a tape in poor condition, such as one that has been reused often for  
recording, you may be unable to record still images, or the still images you do record  
may be distorted.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in “ Me m o ry  
St ick” o n a n im a g e – MEMORY MIX  
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the “Memory Stick” on top of  
the moving picture you are recording. (However you cannot superimpose a still image  
onto the moving picture you have finished recording.) You can record the  
superimposed images on the tape or the “Memory Stick.” (However, you can record  
only superimposed still images on the “Memory Stick.”)  
M. CHROM (Memory Chroma key)  
You can swap only the blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a  
moving picture.  
M. LUMI (Memory Luminance key)  
You can swap the brighter area of a still image (such as a handwritten illustration or a  
title) with a moving picture. To use this function, we recommend recording a title on  
the “Memory Stick” before a trip or event.  
C. CHROM (Camera Chroma key)  
You can superimpose a moving picture on top of a still image such as an image which  
can be used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. Only the blue  
area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image.  
M. OVERLAP (Memory Overlap)*  
You can make a moving picture recording with your camcorder fade in on top of a still  
image recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
M. CHROM  
CAM  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M
CHROM  
Blue  
M. LUMI  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M
CAM  
L UM I  
C. CHROM  
CAM  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M
CHROM  
Blue  
M. OVERLAP*  
Still image  
Moving picture  
OV ER –  
L A P  
* You can select M. OVERLAP when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
The “Memory Stick” supplied w ith your camcorder stores 20 images:  
– For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 101-0001 to 101-0018  
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 101-0019 to 101-0020  
Sample images  
Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are  
protected (p. 135).  
Notes  
• You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
• In the mirror mode (p. 29), the picture on the LCD screen is not a mirror-image.  
Image data modified on a computer  
You may not be able to play modified images back with your camcorder.  
Re co rd in g a su p e rim p o se d im a g e t o t h e t a p e  
Before operation  
• Insert the “Memory Stick” recorded with still images into your camcorder.  
• Insert the tape for recording into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press MEM MIX. The image recorded on the “Memory Stick” appears in the  
lower right corner of the screen.  
(3) Press – (to see the previous image)/ + (to see the next image) in the lower right  
corner of the screen to select the still image that you want to superimpose.  
(4) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture  
during recording standby.  
(5) Press –/ + in the lower left corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
M. CHROM  
M. LUMI  
– The color (blue) scheme of the area in the still image which is  
to be swapped with a moving picture  
– The color (bright) scheme of the area in the still image which  
is to be swapped with a moving picture  
C. CHROM  
– The color (blue) scheme of the area in the moving picture  
which is to be swapped with a still image  
M. OVERLAP* – No adjustment necessary  
* You can select M. OVERLAP when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.  
(6) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(7) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
2
4
MEM MIX  
MEM MIX  
OFF  
OFF MCCAM OVER–  
LUMI LAP  
OK  
OK  
MEM  
MIX  
CAMCM MCCAM  
CHROM CHROM  
Still image  
M. LUMI  
101  
101–0001  
101  
101–0001  
+
+
+
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d  
Press –/ + in the lower right corner before step 5.  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Note  
During recording you cannot reselect the mode. Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
When you select M. OVERLAP  
You cannot change the still image or the mode.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode.  
Re co rd in g a su p e rim p o se d im a g e t o t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” a s a st ill  
im a g e  
Before operation  
Insert the “Memory Stick” recorded with still images into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow the step 1 to 6 on page 117.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply to start recording.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. The image  
displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO deeply will be recorded on  
the “Memory Stick.”  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Image size of still images  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
To record still images as-is to the tape  
Press –/ + in the lower left corner of the screen in M. LUMI mode and keep going until  
the bar display on the right is full.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In t e rva l Ph o t o Re co rd in g  
You can carry out a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically  
record still images.  
Example  
[a ]  
[a ]  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[b ]  
[a ] Memory Photo recording  
[b ] INTERVAL 10min  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select INT. R -STL in  
, then press EXEC (p. 177).  
(4) Select SET, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select INTERVAL, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired interval time, then press EXEC.  
(7) Press  
RET.  
(8) Set INT. R -STL to ON, then press EXEC.  
(9) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator flashes on the screen.  
(10) Press PHOTO deeply.  
Interval Photo Recording starts.  
The INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator lights up on the screen during Interval  
Photo Recording.  
PHOTO  
4
5
EXIT  
EXIT  
MEM SET 2  
INT. R -STL  
INTERVAL  
MEM SET 2  
INT. R -STL  
INTERVAL  
1MIN  
1MIN  
5MIN  
10MIN  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To ca n ce l In t e rva l Ph o t o Re co rd in g  
Set INT. R -STL to OFF in the menu settings.  
Note  
Interval Photo Recording is canceled if you press IMAGE TRANS during Interval Photo  
Recording.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n “ Me m o ry  
St ick” – MPEG MOVIE re co rd in g  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of the “Memory Stick”  
(MPEG MOVIE EX).  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Press START/STOP  
Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording lamp located on the front of  
your camcorder lights up.  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the capacity of the “Memory Stick.” See page  
106 for details of recording time.  
0:00:00  
15sec  
50min  
320REC  
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
101  
[c]  
[a ] Available recording time on the “Memory Stick”  
[b ] This indicator appears for five seconds after pressing START/ STOP. This indicator is  
not recorded.  
[c] Folder name to be recorded  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n “ Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG MOVIE re co rd in g  
Note  
Sound is recorded in monaural.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
– Digital zoom  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Wide mode  
– Fader  
– Picture effect  
– Digital effect  
– SPORTS of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
– Title  
– SteadyShot  
When using an external flash (optional)  
Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on the  
“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, the charging sound of the flash may be recorded.  
Recording date/time  
The date/ time do not appear during recording. However, they are automatically  
recorded onto the “Memory Stick.” To display the recording date/ time, press DATA  
CODE during playback. Various settings cannot be recorded (p. 38).  
Self-timer recording  
You can record moving pictures on the “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. See page  
122 for details.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record still images and moving pictures on the “Memory Stick” with the self-  
timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
START/STOP  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
START/STOP  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeply.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 with a beep. In the last two  
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow the step 1 to 3 in “Recording a still image.”  
(2) Press START/ STOP.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 with a beep. In the last two  
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n fo r re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
With your camcorder during standby, press SELFTIMER and the  
(self-timer)  
indicator disappears from the screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer using the Remote  
Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when self-timer recording is finished.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re fro m t a p e a s a  
m o vin g p ict u re  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a  
moving picture on the “Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press  
. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
(2) Press  
again to pause playback at the scene where you want to start  
recording from.  
(3) Press START/ STOP. Images and sound are recorded up to the remaining  
capacity of the “Memory Stick.” See page 106 for details of recording time.  
50min  
N
320REC  
0:15:42:43  
0:00:03  
15sec  
3
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
101  
[c]  
1,2  
[a ] Available recording time on the “Memory Stick”  
[b ] This indicator appears for five seconds after pressing START/ STOP. This indicator is  
not recorded.  
[c] Folder name to be recorded  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
Notes  
• Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to one in 32 kHz when recording images from  
the tape to the “Memory Stick.”  
• Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from the  
tape.  
Titles  
You cannot record the titles.  
If the “  
AUDIO ERROR” indicator appears  
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/ V  
connecting cable to input images played back on an external device (p. 124).  
Recording date/time  
The date/ time when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” are recorded. Various  
settings are not recorded.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
You can use either A/ V connecting cable or i.LINK cable. Connect the devices as  
illustrated on page 87.  
When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, set DISPLAY in  
menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
to LCD in the  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Play back the recorded tape on the VCR, or turn the TV on to see a desired  
program.  
The image of the other equipment is displayed on the LCD screen or in the  
viewfinder.  
(2) Press START/ STOP at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Note  
In the following instances, recording may stop in the middle, or distorted images may  
be recorded:  
– If the tape has a blank portion  
– If recording from a tape in a poor condition, such as one that has been reused often for  
recording  
– If the input signal is cut off  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a  
m o vin g p ict u re – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
(o n “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto the “Memory Stick.”  
Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert the tape for playback, and the “Memory Stick” for recording into your  
camcorder.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 182).  
(5) Select MEMORY, then press EXEC.  
(6) Repeat pressing IMAGESIZE to select a desired size. The image size changes  
when you press IMAGESIZE.  
(7) Follow the step 6 to 10 on page 84.  
4
5
EXIT  
V I DEO ED IT  
0:32:30:14  
15sec  
320  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
MARK START  
IN  
IMAGE  
SIZE  
UNDO  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0:00:00  
SCENE  
0
END  
EXEC  
RET.  
To fin ish m a kin g p ro g ra m s  
Press  
END.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Notes  
• You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of Cassette Memory.  
• You cannot operate recording during the Digital program editing on the “Memory  
Stick.”  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of the tape.  
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape  
The total time may not appear correctly.  
During making a program  
If you eject the cassette, the NOT READY indicator appears on the screen. The program  
will be erased.  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
See “Erasing the program you have set” on page 85.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 182).  
(4) Select MEMORY, then press EXEC.  
(5) Follow the step 2 to 4 on page 85.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 182).  
(4) Select MEMORY, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press START.  
(6) Press EXEC.  
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts  
dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during searching, the EDITING indicator  
appears during writing of data on your camcorder, and the REC indicator  
appears during dubbing on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.  
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.  
To st o p d u b b in g  
Press CANCEL.  
The program you made is recorded on the “Memory Stick” up to the place where you  
pressed CANCEL.  
To e n d Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO  
EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press  
END to end Digital program editing.  
Note  
In the following instances, recording may stop in middle, or distorted images may be  
recorded:  
– If the tape has a blank portion  
– If recording from a tape in a poor condition, such as one that has been reused often for  
recording  
The NOT READY indicator appears on the screen w hen:  
– The program to operate Digital program editing has not been made.  
– The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.  
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.  
When the available recording time of the “Memory Stick” is not enough  
The LOW MEMORY indicator appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures  
up to the time indicated.  
When the program has not been set  
You cannot press START.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e re co rd in g fo ld e r  
You can create folders up to “999MSDCF” in the “Memory Stick.”  
The default setting is “101MSDCF” folder to record.  
Cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select NEW FOLDER in  
, then press EXEC (p. 176).  
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER ADD  
REC FOLDER RETURN  
FILE NO.  
ADD FOLDER  
102MSDCF  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ADD, then press EXEC. A folder with the maximum number+1 will be  
created. A created folder is automatically set to the folder to record.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r  
Select RETURN, then press EXEC in step 4.  
Ch o o sin g t h e re co rd in g fo ld e r  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select REC FOLDER in  
, then press EXEC (p. 176).  
REC FOLDER  
EXIT  
101  
101MSDCF  
102MSDCF  
103MSDCF  
104MSDCF  
105MSDCF  
106MSDCF  
DATE:  
JUL  
4
2003  
12:24:24PM  
FILES:  
40  
EXEC  
(4) Press r/ R to select a folder you want to save to, then press EXEC.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
Notes  
• Up to 9999 image files can be recorded in each folder. When a folder is full, a new  
folder is automatically created.  
• Once a folder is created, it cannot be deleted with your camcorder.  
• The more folders you have created, the less the remaining capacity of the “Memory  
Stick” becomes.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g a st ill im a g e  
Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
You can play back still images recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
You can also play back six images including moving pictures at a time arranged in the  
same order of recording on the “Memory Stick” by selecting the index screen. You can  
also use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(2) Press – (to see the previous image)/ + (to see the next image) on your  
camcorder to select a desired still image.  
To ca n ce l Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Press CAM.  
When no file is in the folder  
The “NO FILE AVAILABLE” indicator appears.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck  
To make screen indicators disappear, press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO.  
Image size  
Image number/ Total number of recorded images  
in the current playback folder  
6/6 101  
MEMORY PLAY  
640  
Folder number  
101–0006  
Print mark  
Protect  
JUL 4 2003  
12:05:56 PM  
Recording date/ time/ Camera data  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
Data file name  
Recording data  
To display the recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded), press  
DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this  
operation (p. 38).  
Notes on the file name  
• The folder may not appear and only the file name may appear if the structure of the  
folder does not conform to the DCF standard.  
• The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.  
When the “Memory Stick” contains multiple folders  
The following icons appear on the screen on the first or last images in a folder.  
:You can move to the previous folder.  
:You can move to the next folder.  
:You can move to both the previous and the next folders.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g a st ill im a g e – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )  
This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image.  
Press INDEX to display the index screen  
A red B mark appears above the image that appears before changing to the index  
screen mode.  
T : To display the previous six images  
t : To display the next six images  
B mark  
-MARK  
MARK  
DEL  
2
EXIT  
3
1
4
This number indicates the order  
in which images are recorded on  
the “Memory Stick.”  
5
6
1/40  
101  
T
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )  
Press the image you want to display.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g a m o vin g p ict u re  
MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
You can play back moving pictures recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
You can also play back six images including still images in order of recording on the  
“Memory Stick” at a time by selecting the index screen.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press PLAY. The last recorded image appears.  
(2) Press – (to see the previous picture)/ + (to see the next picture) to select a  
desired moving picture.  
(3) Press MPEG N X to start playback.  
(4) Adjust the volume following the steps below.  
1 Press FN and select PAGE3.  
2 Press VOL. The screen to adjust volume appears.  
3 Press – (to turn down the volume)/ + (to turn up the volume) to adjust the  
volume.  
4 Press  
OK to return to PAGE3.  
5 Press EXIT to return to FN.  
1
PLAY  
To ca n ce l MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X.  
When no file is in the folder  
The “NO FILE AVAILABLE” indicator appears.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g a m o vin g p ict u re – MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
Pla yb a ck p ict u re fro m d e sire d p a rt  
The moving picture recorded on the “Memory Stick” is divided into parts. It is divided  
into a maximum of 60.  
You can select every each one point and playback pictures.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow the step 1 and 2 on page 130.  
(2) Press < (to see previous part)/ , (to see next part) to select the point where  
you want to play back.  
1/20 101  
00 00  
320  
:
:
MOV00001  
0
MPEG  
N X  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
(3) Follow the step 3 and 4 on page 130.  
To ca n ce l MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X.  
When recording time is too short  
The moving picture may not be divided into parts.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck  
To make screen indicators appear or disappear, press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO.  
Image size  
Picture number/ Total number of recorded pictures in  
the current playback folder  
Folder number  
6/6 101  
0:00:12  
320  
MOV00006  
MPEG  
N X  
Memory playback time  
Protect  
JUL 4 2003  
12:05:56 PM  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
Recording date/ time (Camera data appear as  
“– – –.”)  
Data file name  
Recording date/time  
To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also  
131  
use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 38).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch o o sin g p la yb a ck fo ld e r  
You can change the folder currently chosen for playback. The currently chosen folder is  
displayed in the upper right on the screen.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display to PAGE1.  
(2) Press PB FOLDR.  
(3) Press –/ + to select the folder number you want to play back, then press  
END to return to PAGE1.  
PB FOLDER  
101  
END  
+
:
FOLDER NAME  
101MSDCF  
:
DATE  
JUL  
4
:
2003  
:
12 24 24AM  
:
FILES  
40  
– : To select the previous folder  
+ : To select the next folder  
(4) Press EXIT to play back the image.  
Note  
Your camcorder does not recognize folder names created or changed using the  
computer.  
Current playback folder  
The current playback folder is valid until the next recording is made. Once you record  
an image, the current folder to record becomes the current playback folder.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n  
Me m o ry St ick” – Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge still images recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Play back the image to enlarge in the frame.  
(2) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(3) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.  
(4) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame.  
The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback  
image is enlarged to about twice the size. If you then press another area, that  
area moves to the center of the screen.  
(5) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can select the image from approximately 1.1 times up to 5 times its size.  
W: Decrease the zoom ratio.  
T : Increase the zoom ratio.  
Pow er zoom lever  
3
PB ZOOM  
MEMORY PLAY  
PB  
ZOOM  
END  
To ca n ce l m e m o ry PB ZOOM  
Press  
END.  
Memory PB ZOOM is canceled w hen you press the follow ing buttons on the  
Remote Commander:  
– MEMORY PLAY  
– MEMORY INDEX  
– MEMORY +/ –  
In memory PB ZOOM  
If you press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO, the frame on the memory PB ZOOM screen  
disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.  
Edge of an enlarged image  
The edge of an enlarged image cannot be displayed in the center of the screen.  
Moving pictures recorded on the “Memory Stick”  
Memory PB ZOOM does not work.  
To record images processed by memory PB ZOOM to the “Memory Stick”  
Press PHOTO to record images during display. The image size will be 640 × 480.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
– Slid e sh o w  
You can play back all the images in the “Memory Stick” or in the specified folder using  
slide show.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select SLIDE SHOW in  
, then press EXEC (p. 177).  
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW RETURN  
INT. R –STL  
ALL FILES  
2
EXIT  
DELETE ALL FOLDER 101  
FORMAT  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ALL FILES or FOLDER sss*, then press EXEC.  
ALL FILES:  
To play back all of the images in the “Memory Stick”  
FOLDER sss*: To play back the images in the folder selected with PB  
FOLDR  
* The folder name is displayed in the sss.  
(5) Press START. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” in sequence. When all images are played back, slide show  
automatically stops.  
To ca n ce l slid e sh o w  
Press  
END.  
To p a u se slid e sh o w  
Press PAUSE.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE1, then press EXIT.  
To st a rt slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e  
Select a desired image using –/ + buttons before step 5.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
– Im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
(2) Press - MARK. The screen to protect the image appears.  
(3) Press the image you want to protect. The - indicator appears above the  
protected image.  
1
INDEX  
RET.  
-
-
MARK  
EXIT  
3
1
4
2
5
2,3  
6
-MARK  
2/40 101  
T
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
Press the image you want to cancel image protection in step 3 again.  
The - indicator disappears from the image.  
Note  
Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected  
image data. Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
You cannot carry out or cancel image protection.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
You can delete all images or selected images.  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Play back the image you want to delete.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press DEL. The DELETE? indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press OK. The selected image is deleted.  
3/40 101  
DELETE  
101–0003  
3
DELETE?  
DEL  
OK  
CAN–  
CEL  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press CANCEL in step 4.  
Notes  
• To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.  
• Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to delete carefully  
before deleting them.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
You cannot delete images.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s o n t h e in d e x scre e n  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
(2) Press DEL. Then press the image you want to delete. The number of the  
selected image is highlighted.  
(3) Press EXEC. The DELETE? indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press OK. The selected images are deleted.  
1
INDEX  
RET.  
DEL  
EXEC  
2
EXIT  
3
1
4
2
5
6
DEL  
3/40  
T
101  
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press CANCEL in step 4.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
De le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s  
You can delete all the unprotected images in the “Memory Stick.”  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select DELETE ALL in  
, then press EXEC (p. 177).  
MEM SET  
2
EXIT  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R –STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
ALL FILES  
FOLDER 101  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ALL FILES or FOLDER sss*, then press EXEC.  
ALL FILES: To delete all of the images in the “Memory Stick”  
FOLDER sss*: To delete the image in the folder selected with PB FOLDR  
* The folder name is displayed in the sss.  
(5) Select OK, then press EXEC.  
OK changes to EXECUTE.  
(6) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC.  
The DELETING indicator appears, then flashes on the screen.  
When all the unprotected images are deleted, the COMPLETE indicator  
appears.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press EXEC.  
While the DELETING indicator appears  
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.  
Deleting all the images  
You cannot delete the folders.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g im a g e size – Re size  
You can change the image size of recorded still images to 640 × 480 or 320 × 240.  
Reducing the image size is convenient for use in attachments to e-mail.  
The original image is retained even after resizing.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During memory playback, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press RESIZE.  
The RESIZE screen appears.  
101  
3/40  
640  
RESIZE  
101-0003  
END  
101  
640 × 320 ×  
480 240  
+
(3) Press 640 × 480 or 320 × 240.  
The image is recorded as the most recently used file in the selected folder to  
record.  
To ch a n g e st ill im a g e s  
Press –/ + before step 3.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE2, then press EXIT.  
Notes  
• You cannot resize the picture recorded with MPEG MOVIE recording.  
• You may not be able to change the size of an image recorded with another camcorder.  
• You cannot choose the image quality when you resize the image.  
Memory capacity after resizing  
Image size  
640 × 480  
320 × 240  
Memory capacity  
About 150 KB  
About 16 KB  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk – Prin t m a rk  
This function is useful for printing out still images later. (You cannot specify the  
number for printouts.)  
Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for  
specifying the still images to print out.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
(2) Press  
MARK. The screen to write a print mark appears.  
(3) Press the image you want to write a print mark. The  
appears on the  
selected image.  
1
INDEX  
RET.  
MARK  
EXIT  
3
1
4
2
5
2,3  
6
MARK  
2/40  
T
101  
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l w rit in g p rin t m a rks  
Press the image you want to cancel the print mark in step 3 again. The  
from the image.  
disappears  
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
You cannot write or cancel print marks on still images.  
Moving pictures  
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r —  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r  
– In t ro d u ct io n  
There are following ways of connecting your camcorder to a computer in order to view  
images saved on the “Memory Stick” or recorded on the tape on a computer.  
To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first eject the “Memory  
Stick” from your camcorder, then insert it into your computers Memory Stick slot.  
Reference pages  
Computer  
Camcorder  
connection jack  
Connection  
cable  
For  
For  
environment  
requirements  
Window s Macintosh  
Users  
Users  
144 – 146  
148 – 149  
154 – 157  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB port,  
editing software  
USB jack  
DV Interface  
USB jack  
Tape image/  
live from your  
camcorder  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
DV port,  
editing software  
142  
144 – 147  
150  
161 – 163  
“Memory  
Stick” image  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB port,  
editing software  
164 – 166  
When connecting to a computer w ith the USB port, complete installation of the  
USB driver before connecting your camcorder to the computer. If you connect  
your camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not be able to install the USB  
driver correctly.  
For details about the computers ports and editing software, contact the computer  
manufacturer.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB p o rt  
See page 144 for details.  
(USB)  
USB port  
Push into  
the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e DV p o rt  
The computer must have a DV port and editing software installed that can read video  
signals.  
DV Interface  
i.LINK  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB p o rt  
See page 144 when using Windows and page 164 when using Macintosh.  
(USB)  
Push into the end  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
You can also use a “Memory Stick” Reader/ Writer (optional).  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o t h e co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB p o rt  
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory  
Stick.  
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended  
operating environment.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n  
No t e s o n u sin g a co m p u t e r  
Me m o ry St ick”  
• “Memory Stick” operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if the “Memory  
Stick” formatted on a computer is used on your camcorder, or if the “Memory Stick”  
in your camcorder was formatted from the computer when the USB cable was  
connected.  
• Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be played  
back on your camcorder.  
So ft w a re  
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a  
still image file.  
• When you load an image modified using retouching software from a computer to  
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image  
format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open  
the file.  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h a co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and a computer may not recover after  
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting your camcorder to  
a computer. If you connect your camcorder to a computer first, you w ill not  
be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB p o rt  
You must install a USB driver onto the computer in order to connect your camcorder to  
the computers USB port. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along  
with the application software required for viewing images.  
If you connect your camcorder and a computer using the USB cable, you can view  
pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on the tape on a computer  
(USB Streaming function).  
Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to a computer, you can  
process or edit them in image processing software and append them to e-mail.  
You can view images recorded on the “Memory Stick” on a computer.  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
w it h t h e USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t a p e p ict u re s o n a co m p u t e r  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP  
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
You cannot hear sound if a computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still  
images.  
CPU:  
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)  
Application:  
DirectX 8.0a or later  
Sound system:  
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers  
Memory:  
64MB or more  
Hard disk:  
Available memory required for installation:  
at least 250MB  
Available hard disk memory recommended:  
at least 1GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)  
Display:  
4MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot High color (16 bit color, 65,000 colors),  
Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this  
product will not operate correctly.)  
Others:  
This product is based on DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.  
The USB port must be provided as standard.  
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
w it h USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” im a g e s o n a  
co m p u t e r  
Recommended Window s environment  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,  
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
CPU:  
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster  
Display:  
Minimum 800 × 600 dot High color (16 bit color, 65,000 colors). (At 800 × 600 dot or less,  
256 colors and less, the screen for installing USB driver is not displayed.)  
Others:  
The USB port must be provided as standard.  
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).  
Notes  
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
• Windows and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/ or other countries.  
• Pentium is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation.  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to  
the computer.  
Connect the USB cable according to “Making the computer recognize  
your camcorder.”  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on a computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The  
application software starts up.  
If the screen does not appear, double-click “My Computer,” then  
“ImageMixer” (CD-ROM Drive).  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
Click  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to “USB Driver” and click. This starts USB driver installation.  
Click  
(5) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.  
(6) Remove the CD-ROM, then restart the computer and follow the on-screen  
messages.  
Notes  
• If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver  
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again following the on-screen  
messages.  
• The title screen is not displayed if the screen size of the computer is set to less than  
800 × 600 dots and 256 colors or less. See page 144, 145 about the recommended  
computer environment.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
In st a llin g Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
Make sure USB driver installation is complete.  
This function enables image data recorded on the “Memory Stick” to be automatically  
transferred (copied) to a computer.  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The  
application software starts up.  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to “Image Transfer” and click.  
Click  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Choose Setup Language”  
screen appears.  
(5) Select the language for installation.  
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
In st a llin g Im a g e Mixe r  
Make sure USB driver installation is complete.  
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” is an application that can capture or edit images, or  
create video CDs.  
To install and use this software in Windows 2000, you must be authorized as  
administrators. For Windows XP, you must be authorized as computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on a computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.  
The application software starts up.  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to “ImageMixer” and click.  
Click  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Choose Setup Language”  
screen appears.  
(5) Select the language for installation.  
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
(7) Follow the on-screen messages to install WinASPI.  
(8) If DirectX 8.0a or later is not installed on the computer, continue installation  
after installing ImageMixer.  
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX 8.0a. After installation is  
complete, restart the computer.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
MEMORY MIX album  
Once “ImageMixer” is installed, the MEMORY MIX album is created in “Album” of  
“ImageMixer” and sample images are stored in there.  
Those sample images can be transferred from the MEMORY MIX album to a “Memory  
Stick” so that they can be used in MEMORY MIX (p. 116).  
Refer to the on-line help for details on the operation procedure.  
Replacing WinASPI  
To be able to use the ImageMixer CD writing function, you need to install WinASPI. If a  
different writing application was previously installed, its writing function may not  
work correctly. If that happens, reinstall the original application and replace WinASPI.  
Note that the ImageMixer CD writing function may not work properly.  
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize yo u r ca m co rd e r  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
(1) Connect the AC Adaptor, then set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(4) Select USB STREAM in  
, then press EXEC (p. 180).  
(5) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(6) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The computer recognizes your camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware  
Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(7) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. Be sure to allow the installation to  
complete without interrupting it.  
For Window s 2000, Window s XP users  
When the dialog box to confirm the digital signature appears, select “Yes” if you use  
Windows 2000 or select “Continue Anyway” if you use Windows XP.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
(1) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor, then set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The USB MODE indicator appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. The  
computer recognizes your camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the  
installation to complete without interrupting it.  
You cannot install the USB driver if the “Memory Stick” is not in your camcorder  
Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder before installing the USB  
driver.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as a computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was complete. Follow the procedure  
below to correctly install the USB driver.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Connect the AC Adaptor, then set the POWER switch to VCR.  
3 Connect the USB port on the computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the USB cable supplied.  
4 Open the computers Device Manager.”  
Window s XP:  
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and click the  
“Device Manager” button.  
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”  
click “Switch to classic view” instead.  
Window s 2000:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab,  
and click the “Device Manager” button.  
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device  
Manager.”  
5 Select and delete the underlined devices below.  
Window s 98SE  
Window s Me  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Window s 2000  
Window s XP  
6 Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, then disconnect the  
USB cable.  
7 Restart the computer.  
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Follow the entire procedure in “Installing the USB driver” on page 146.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
3 Connect the AC Adaptor, then set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
4 Connect the USB port on the computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the USB cable supplied.  
5 Open the computers Device Manager.”  
Window s XP:  
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab and click  
the “Device Manager” button.  
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”  
click “Switch to classic view” instead.  
Window s 2000:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and  
click the “Device Manager” button.  
Other OS:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device  
Manager.”  
6 Select “Other devices.”  
Select the device prefixed with the “?” mark and delete.  
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam  
7 Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, then disconnect the  
USB cable.  
8 Restart the computer.  
Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Follow the entire procedure in “Installing the USB driver” on page 146.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a  
co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h “ Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.5 fo r So n y”  
You need to install the USB driver and ImageMixer to view pictures recorded on the  
tape on a computer (p. 146, 148).  
View ing pictures recorded on the tape  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor, then insert the cassette into your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(4) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(5) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(6) Select USB STREAM in  
, then press EXEC (p. 180).  
(7) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(8) Select “Start” t “Programs” t “PIXELA” t “ImageMixer” t  
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony.”  
The “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” startup screen appears on the computer.  
The title screen appears.  
(9) Click  
on the screen.  
(10) Click  
.
Monitor window  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
(11) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(12) Click  
to start playback.  
You can control video operations with the buttons on the screen.  
The picture from the tape appears on the monitor window on the computer.  
Monitor window  
Video control  
buttons  
View ing pictures live from your camcorder  
(1) Follow the step 1 and 2 on page 154.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(3) Follow the step 4 to 11 on pages 154, 155.  
The picture from your camcorder appears on the monitor window on the  
computer.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s  
Monitor window  
Thumbnail list window  
(1) Click  
.
(2) Looking at the monitor window, move the cursor to  
point you want to capture.  
and click it at the  
The still image on the screen is captured.  
Captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.  
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s  
Thumbnail list window  
Monitor window  
Video control buttons  
(1) Click  
(2) Click  
(3) Looking at the monitor window, click  
want to capture. changes to  
.
to start playback.  
at the first scene of the movie you  
at the last scene you want to  
.
(4) Looking at the monitor window, click  
capture.  
The moving picture is captured. The captured images appear in the thumbnail  
list window.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
To clo se “ Im a g e Mixe r”  
Click  
in the upper right corner of the screen.  
Notes  
• When you view images on a computer with the USB connection, the following may  
occur. This is not a malfunction.  
– The image shakes up and down.  
– Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.  
– Some images are displayed with the cracking noise.  
– Images of different color systems to that of your camcorder are not displayed  
correctly.  
• When your camcorder is during standby with a cassette inserted, it turns off  
automatically after five minutes.  
• We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your  
camcorder is during standby, and no cassette is inserted.  
• Indicators on the screen of your camcorder do not appear on images that are captured  
into the computer.  
• If you capture a fast moving picture, the monitor window may not move smoothly.  
You can make the picture move more smoothly by shifting the upper right slider on  
the bottom of the monitor window to the left, although this reduces the picture  
quality.  
• You cannot carry out any “Memory Stick” operations during the USB Streaming  
function.  
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as the computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was complete. Reinstall the USB driver  
following the procedure on page 151.  
If any trouble occurs  
Close all running applications, then restart the computer.  
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:  
– Disconnect the USB cable.  
– Turn the POWER switch to the other position on your camcorder.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ma kin g Vid e o CDs – Ea sy Vid e o CD  
This function makes it simple to create a video CD by capturing images recorded on a  
tape or images live from your camcorder.  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n t o a CD-R  
(1) Follow the step 1 to 8 on page 154.  
(2) Press  
after choosing the point on the tape from which you want to  
capture images onto the CD-R.  
(3) Click  
.
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(5) Insert a new CD-R in the CD-R drive of the computer.  
(6) Click “Start.”  
The tape is automatically played back. Easy Video CD automatically begins to  
capture images onto the CD-R to create a Video CD.  
(7) After the “Video CD successfully created.” message appears, click “Quit.”  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r o n t o a CD-R  
Eject the cassette before operation. Your camcorder automatically turns off after about  
five minutes if the cassette is inserted.  
(1) Follow the step 1 and 2 on page 154.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA on your camcorder.  
(3) Follow the step 4 to 8 on page 154.  
(4) Follow the step 3 to 7 in “Capturing images recorded on a tape onto a CD-R.”  
Notes  
• A computer equipped with a CD-R drive is required.  
• Do not press the buttons on your camcorder while creating a Video CD. If you press  
, only images up to that point are captured onto the Video CD and Easy Video  
CD is closed.  
• Once a disc has been created you cannot add images to it.  
• Select a hard disc with sufficient memory (at least 6GB) from the “Option” screen as a  
location for the “Location of work folder.”  
Pla yin g b a ck Vid e o CDs  
You can use a DVD player or a computer with a DVD drive to play back the Video CDs  
you create.  
To play back Video CDs on a computer, you need to have Video CD software installed.  
You can play back Video CDs with Windows Media Player. However you cannot use  
menu functions such as capturing function. You also may not be able to play back  
Video CDs in certain computer environment such as OS or hardware.  
(1) Start up Windows Media Player.  
Window s XP:  
Select “Start” t “All Programs” t “Accessory” t “Entertainment,” and  
click “Windows Media Player.”  
Other OS:  
Select “Start” t “Programs” t “Accessory” t “Entertainment,” and click  
“Windows Media Player.”  
(2) Select “My Computer” t “CD-R,” and click “MPEGAV” folder, then drag  
and drop the “sss*.DAT” moving picture file onto the Media Player screen.  
The moving picture will be played back.  
* The file name is displayed in the sss.  
Created Video CDs  
The maximum recording time is about one hour.  
Capturing is divided into segments of about 10 minutes (approximately 4GB) due to the  
specifications of the AVI capturing format. As a result, recording includes segment  
links about every 10 minutes, at which point images are skipped for several seconds.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f Im a g e Mixe r  
A “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” on-line help site is available where you can find the  
detailed operating method of “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony.”  
(1) Click  
located in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The ImageMixers Manual screen appears.  
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.  
To close on-line help  
Click  
at the top right of the screen.  
If you have any questions about ImageMixer  
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” is the product of PIXELA corporation. For details, refer  
to the operating instructions of the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry  
St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
The image data recorded on the “Memory Stick” is automatically transferred (copied) to  
a computer with Image Transfer. You can view images with ImageMixer.  
You need to install the USB diver, Image Transfer and ImageMixer to view the  
“Memory Stick” images on a computer (p. 146 to 148).  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, then connect the AC Adaptor  
to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(5) Image Transfer automatically starts up and the transfer of image data begins.  
(6) ImageMixer automatically starts up, enabling you to view the copied image.  
Import button  
(7) Select an album and the image, then press the import button. The image is  
added in your album, and you can edit the image.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h o u t Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
Before operation  
• You need to install the USB driver to view the “Memory Stick” images on a computer  
(p. 146).  
• An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving  
pictures in Windows environment.  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, then connect the AC Adaptor  
to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The USB MODE indicator appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(5) Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly recognized  
drive (Example: “Removable Disk (F:)”).  
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” appear.  
(6) Double-click a desired image file from the folder in this order.  
“DCIM” folder t sssMSDCF” folder1) t Image file2)  
See “Image file storage destinations and image files” (p. 163), for the detailed  
folder and file name.  
1) sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.  
2) Copying a file to the hard disk of the computer before viewing it is recommended. If  
you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image and sound may  
break off.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s  
Image data recorded with your camcorder is stored in a folder in the “Memory Stick.”  
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within  
the range from 0001 to 9999.  
Exa m p le : Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs  
(Th e d rive re co g n izin g yo u r ca m co rd e r is [F:].)  
Folder containing image files recorded using  
other camcorders w ithout the folder creation  
function (for playback only)  
Folder containing image files recorded w ith your  
camcorder  
When no new folders have been created, this is  
only “101MSDCF”  
Folder containing moving picture data recorded  
using other camcorders w ithout the folder  
creation function (for playback only)  
Folder  
101MSDCF  
File  
Meaning  
Still image file  
Moving picture file  
DSC0ssss.JPG  
MOV0ssss.MPG  
(up to 999MSDCF)  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)  
For Window s 2000, Window s Me, Window s XP users  
(1) Move the cursor to the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” on the Task Tray and  
click to cancel the applicable drive.  
(2) After the “Safe to remove” message appears, disconnect the USB cable and  
eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs)  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto a computer in order to connect your camcorder to  
the computers USB port. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along  
with the application software required for viewing images.  
Re co m m e n d e d Ma cin t o sh e n viro n m e n t  
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1/ v10.2) standard installation is  
required.  
However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following  
models.  
• iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive  
• iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation  
The USB port must be provided as standard.  
QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
Notes  
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
• Macintosh, Mac OS, iBook, Power Mac and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple  
Computer Inc.  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs)  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Do not connect the USB cable to a computer before installation of the USB  
driver is complete.  
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow the Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the computer.  
The application software screen appears.  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Click the “USB Driver” to open the folder containing the six files related to  
“Driver.”  
Click  
(5) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.  
• Sony Camcorder USB Driver  
• Sony Camcorder USB Shim  
(6) When the message appears, click “OK.”  
The USB driver is installed on the computer.  
(7) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.  
(8) Restart the computer.  
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1/v10.2)  
The USB driver need not be installed. Your camcorder is automatically recognized as a  
drive just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry  
St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
• You need to install the USB driver to view the “Memory Stick” images on a computer  
(p. 165).  
• QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, then connect the AC Adaptor  
to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The USB MODE indicator appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Double-click the “Memory Stick” icon on the desktop.  
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.  
(6) Double-click a desired image file from the folder in this order.  
“DCIM” folder t sssMSDCF” folder1) t Image file2)  
1) sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.  
2) Copying a file to the hard disk of a computer before viewing it is recommended. If  
you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image and sound may  
break off.  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)  
(1) Close all running applications.  
Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.  
(2) Drag the “Memory Stick” icon into the “Trash.” Alternatively, select the  
“Memory Stick” icon by clicking on it, then select “Eject disk” from the  
“Special” menu at the top left of the screen.  
(3) Disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER  
switch to OFF (CHG).  
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users  
Shut down the computer, then disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory Stick”  
or set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o  
u n it o n a co m p u t e r  
– Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to a computer  
which has the DV port to your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Select A/ V t DV OUT in  
, then press EXEC (p. 175).  
(4) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(5) Start playback on the analog video unit.  
(6) Start capturing procedures on the computer.  
The operation procedures depend on the computer and the software which  
you use.  
For details of how to capture images, refer to the operating instructions of the  
computer and software.  
White  
Yellow  
i.LINK  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Red  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
VCR  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
: Signal flow  
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d  
Stop capturing procedures on the computer, and stop playback on the analog video  
unit.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it o n a co m p u t e r  
– Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
Notes  
• You need the software and computer that support the exchange of digital video  
signals.  
• Depending on the condition of the analog video signals, the computer may not be able  
to output the images correctly when you convert video signals into digital video  
signals via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may  
contain noise or incorrect colors.  
• You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video  
tape include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.  
If the computer has a USB port  
You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transferred smoothly.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n —  
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk  
– DCR-TRV80 o n ly  
You can access the Internet using a Bluetooth device (optional) or a dedicated accessory  
that serves as a USB Network Adaptor (optional) etc.  
Once the access is made, you can view a Web page, send/ receive your e-mail, etc. This  
section describes only how to open the network menu.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
Press NETWORK.  
The network menu appears.  
For details, refer to the Network Function/ Application Operating Instructions supplied  
with your camcorder.  
(Bluetooth) lamp  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
LOCK  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
NETWORK  
Notes  
• Make sure that your camcorder is during standby with the POWER switch set to  
MEMORY/ NETWORK.  
• Do not remove the power source while operating the network functions or your  
network settings may be erased. Also, close the network function before you turn the  
POWER switch.  
On trademarks  
• The Bluetooth trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony  
Corporation under license.  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk  
Ho w t o h o ld yo u r ca m co rd e r w h e n o p e ra t in g n e t w o rk fu n ct io n s  
Hold your camcorder with your hand through the grip belt to keep from dropping it.  
The operation buttons needed for network functions appear on the LCD screen. Press  
the buttons with the stylus supplied.  
Aft e r u sin g t h e st ylu s  
Put it back in the stylus holder. Hold the stylus correctly as illustrated and insert it until  
it clicks.  
Note  
While operating the network functions, do not cover the part as shown in the  
illustration or radio waves may be blocked.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g a p p lica t io n s  
– DCR-TRV80 o n ly  
Using your camcorder as a Remote Camera, you can operate your camcorder remotely  
from a computer or a PDA with Bluetooth (optional) etc. You can also transfer a still  
image (Image Transport) between your camcorder and a computer or a PDA with  
Bluetooth (optional) etc.  
Usin g a s a Re m o t e Ca m e ra  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press RMT CAM.  
Your camcorder is set to connecting standby.  
REMOTE CAMERA STANDBY  
SONY DCR-TRV80  
08 : 00 : 46 : 3E : 61 : C3  
END  
For details, refer to the Network Function/ Application Operating Instructions supplied  
with your camcorder.  
Im a g e Tra n sp o rt  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press IMAGE TRANS.  
IMAGETRANS  
RET.  
SEND RECV  
LOG PLAY  
For details, refer to the Network Function/ Application Operating Instructions supplied  
with your camcorder.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with r/ R . The  
default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and  
the mode.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
,
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(3) Press r/ R to select a desired icon, then press EXEC.  
(4) Press r/ R to select a desired item, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press r/ R to select a desired setting, then press EXEC.  
(6) Repeat step 3 to 5 if you want to change other items. Press  
step 3.  
RET. to return to  
See “Selecting the mode setting of each item” for details (p. 173).  
2
MENU  
3
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
OTHERS  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
OTHERS  
EXIT  
EXIT  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER Bogota  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
AREA26  
NewYork  
P
EFFECT  
RED EYE  
R
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
GMT -5.0  
JUL 2003  
12:24:24PM  
4
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXIT  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC RET.  
MANUAL SET  
P
EFFECT  
4
5
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
EXIT  
EXIT  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER ON  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
ON  
OFF  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXIT  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
RED EYE  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
R
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
EXIT  
EXIT  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
COMMANDER ON  
OFF  
DISPLAY  
OFF  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
REC LAMP  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:  
MANUAL SET  
CAMERA SET  
VCR SET  
LCD/ VF SET  
MEM SET 1  
MEM SET 2  
CM SET  
TAPE SET  
SETUP MENU  
OTHERS  
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m  
z is the default setting.  
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.  
The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.  
POWER  
sw itch  
Mode  
Meaning  
Icon/item  
MANUAL SET  
——  
To suit your specific shooting requirement (p. 57)  
PROGRAM AE  
——  
To add special effects like those in movies or on  
the TV to images (p. 53, 69)  
P EFFECT  
z OFF  
Red-eye reduction does not function.  
RED EYE R  
ON  
Preliminary flash before recording prevents red-  
eye.  
HIGH  
z NORMAL  
LOW  
To make the flash level higher than normal  
To use the normal setting  
FLASH LVL  
To make the flash level lower than normal  
To adjust the white balance (p. 47)  
——  
WHT BAL  
——  
To adjust the sharpness of the image outline with  
SHARPNESS  
R/ r.  
To soften  
To sharpen  
z ON  
To automatically activate the electronic shutter*  
when shooting in bright conditions  
AUTO SHTR  
OFF  
To not automatically activate the electronic  
shutter* even when shooting in bright conditions  
* The electronic shutter is the function used to adjust the shutter speed automatically.  
Note on RED EYE R and FLASH LVL  
You cannot adjust RED EYE R and FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not  
compatible.  
(continued on the following page)  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
CAMERA SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
D ZOOM  
z OFF  
20×  
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom is  
carried out.  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to 20×  
zoom is performed digitally (p. 31).  
120×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to  
120× zoom is performed digitally.  
EXPANDED F  
16:9WIDE  
z OFF  
To not activate the expanded focus  
ON  
While focusing manually, the center of the screen  
is displayed at twice the size (p. 61).  
z OFF  
To not record a 16:9 wide picture  
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 48)  
To compensate for camera-shake  
ON  
STEADYSHOT z ON  
OFF  
To cancel SteadyShot. Natural pictures are  
produced when shooting a stationary subject with  
a tripod.  
HOLOGRAM F z AUTO  
The HOLOGRAM AF emits when focusing on  
subjects is difficult in dark places (p. 113)  
OFF  
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit.  
To use the NightShot Light (p. 33)  
To cancel the NightShot Light  
N.S. LIGHT  
z ON  
OFF  
RMTCAM SET*  
PAN/TILT  
z ON  
To use PAN/ TILT  
OFF  
To not use PAN/ TILT  
CAM INFO  
z DSPL ON  
To display the status of your camcorder on the  
screen of a device you want to connect to  
DSPL OFF  
To not display the status of your camcorder on  
the screen of a device you want to connect to  
* DCR-TRV80 only  
Notes on SteadyShot  
• SteadyShot will not correct excessive camera-shake.  
• Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence SteadyShot.  
If you cancel SteadyShot  
The  
(SteadyShot off) indicator appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive  
compensation for camera-shake.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
VCR SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
HiFi SOUND  
z STEREO  
To play back the stereo tape or dual sound track  
tape with main and sub sound (p. 195)  
1
To play back the stereo tape with the left sound or  
the dual sound track tape with main sound  
2
To play back the stereo tape with the right sound  
or the dual sound track tape with sub sound  
AUDIO MIX  
——  
To adjust the balance between stereo 1 and stereo  
2 (p. 94)  
ST1  
ST2  
A/V t DV OUT z OFF  
To output digital images and sound in analog  
format using your camcorder  
ON  
To output analog images and sound in digital  
format using your camcorder (p. 167)  
LCD/VF SET  
LCD B.L.  
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen normal  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the LCD screen  
LCD COLOR  
——  
To adjust the color on the LCD screen with r/ R  
Low intensity  
High intensity  
VF B.L.  
z
BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to  
normal  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the viewfinder screen  
Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.  
• When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during  
recording.  
• When you use power sources other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically  
selected.  
Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR and VF B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
(continued on the following page)  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEM SET 1  
Mode  
Meaning  
STILL SET  
BURST  
z OFF  
Not to record continuously  
NORMAL  
To record from 4 to 25 images continuously  
(p. 109)  
HIGH SPEED To record up to 32 images continuously fast  
EXP BRKTG To record three images continuously with  
different exposure  
QUALITY  
z FINE  
To record still images in the fine image quality  
mode (p. 103)  
STANDARD To record still images in the standard image  
quality mode  
IMAGESIZE  
z 1600 × 1200  
To record still images in 1600 × 1200 size (p. 104)  
640 × 480  
To record still images in 640 × 480 size  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE  
z 320 × 240  
To record moving pictures in 320 × 240 size  
(p. 105)  
160 × 112  
To record moving pictures in 160 × 112 size  
REMAIN z AUTO  
To display the remaining capacity of the  
“Memory Stick” in the following cases:  
• For five seconds after setting the POWER switch  
to VCR and inserting the “Memory Stick”  
• When the remaining capacity of the “Memory  
Stick” is less than two minutes after setting the  
POWER switch to MEMORY  
• For five seconds from the start of moving  
picture recording  
• For five seconds after completing moving  
picture recording  
ON  
To always display the remaining capacity of the  
“Memory Stick”  
NEW FOLDER  
z ADD  
To create a new folder (p. 127)  
To cancel creating a new folder  
To choose a recording folder (p. 127)  
RETURN  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
——  
z SERIES  
To assign file numbers in sequence even when the  
“Memory Stick” is changed  
However, the file numbering is reset if you create  
a new folder or change the recording folder.  
RESET  
To assign file numbers starting with 0001 to each  
“Memory Stick”  
When you select image quality  
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on  
the screen.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEM SET 2  
Mode  
Meaning  
SLIDE SHOW  
RETURN  
To cancel slide show  
z ALL FILES  
To play back all the images on the “Memory  
Stick” executing slide show (p. 134)  
FOLDER  
sss*  
To play back all the images in the playback folder  
you are selecting executing slide show  
INT. R -STL  
DELETE ALL  
ON  
To activate Interval Photo Recording (p. 119)  
To deactivate Interval Photo Recording  
To set INTERVAL for Interval Photo Recording  
To cancel deleting all the image  
z OFF  
SET  
z RETURN  
ALL FILES  
To delete all the unprotected images (p. 138)  
FOLDER  
sss*  
To delete all the images in the playback folder you  
are selecting  
FORMAT  
z RETURN  
To cancel formatting  
OK  
To format the inserted “Memory Stick”  
Formatting erases all information on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before  
formatting.  
1. Select FORMAT, then press EXEC.  
2. Select OK, then press EXEC.  
3. After the EXECUTE indicator appears, press  
EXEC.  
The FORMATTING indicator flashes during  
formatting.  
The COMPLETE indicator appears when  
formatting is complete.  
* The folder name is displayed in the sss.  
Notes on formatting  
• Do not do any of the following while the FORMATTING indicator appears:  
– Turn the POWER switch to the other position  
– Operate buttons  
– Eject the “Memory Stick”  
• The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder has been formatted at factory.  
Formatting with your camcorder is not required.  
• You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
• Format the “Memory Stick” if the “  
FORMAT ERROR” indicator appears.  
• Formatting erases sample images on the “Memory Stick.”  
• Formatting erases protected image data on the “Memory Stick.”  
• Formatting erases newly created folders.  
(continued on the following page)  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
CM SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
TITLE  
——  
To superimpose a title or make your own title  
(p. 95, 97)  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
——  
To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 96)  
z ON  
OFF  
To display the title you have superimposed  
To not display the title  
CM SEARCH  
z ON  
OFF  
To search using Cassette Memory (p. 73, 74)  
To search without using Cassette Memory  
To label the cassette (p. 98)  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
——  
z RETURN  
To cancel erasing all  
OK  
To erase all the data in Cassette Memory (p. 99)  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
Mode  
Meaning  
z SP  
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode  
LP  
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP  
mode  
AUDIO MODE z 12BIT  
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds)  
16BIT  
To record in the 16-bit mode (the one stereo sound  
with high quality)  
qREMAIN  
z AUTO  
To display the remaining tape:  
• For about eight seconds after setting the  
POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA and  
inserting a cassette, then your camcorder  
calculates the remaining amount of tape  
• For about eight seconds after setting the  
POWER switch to VCR and  
is pressed  
ON  
z OFF  
ON  
To always display the remaining tape indicator  
To deactivate frame recording  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
To activate frame recording (p. 65)  
To activate Interval Recording (p. 64)  
To deactivate Interval Recording  
ON  
z OFF  
SET  
To set INTERVAL and REC TIME for Interval  
Recording  
Notes on the LP mode  
• When you record the tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders  
or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.  
• When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/ Master  
mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.  
• You cannot make audio dubbing on the tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP  
mode for the tape to be audio dubbed.  
• When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in  
the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be  
written properly between scenes.  
Notes on AUDIO MODE  
• You cannot dub audio sound on the tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.  
• When playing back the tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the  
balance in AUDIO MIX.  
(continued on the following page)  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
SETUP MENU  
Mode  
Meaning  
CLOCK SET  
——  
To set the date or time (p. 20)  
USB STREAM  
z OFF  
To deactivate the USB Streaming function  
To activate the USB Streaming function  
ON  
LANGUAGE  
z ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ESPAÑOL  
To display the information indicators in English  
To display the information indicators in French  
To display the information indicators in Spanish  
PORTUGUÊS To display the information indicators in  
Portuguese  
To display the information indicators in Chinese  
To display the information indicators in Korean  
z ON  
OFF  
DEMO MODE  
To make the demonstration appear  
To cancel the demonstration mode  
Notes on DEMO MODE  
• You cannot select DEMO MODE when the cassette or the “Memory Stick” is inserted  
in your camcorder.  
• When NIGHTSHOT is slid to ON, the ”NIGHTSHOT” indicator appears on the screen  
and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.  
• If you press the touch panel during the demonstration, the demonstration stops for a  
while, then it starts again after about 10 minutes.  
• DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the default setting and the demonstration  
starts about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without the  
cassette and the “Memory Stick” inserted.  
To cancel the demonstration, insert the cassette or “Memory Stick,” set the POWER  
switch to the position other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu  
settings. To set to STBY (Standby) again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu  
settings, set the POWER switch OFF (CHG), then back to CAMERA.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
DATA CODE  
(On the Remote  
Commander)  
z DATE/ CAM To display date, time and various settings during  
playback when you press DATA CODE on the  
Remote Commander (p. 38)  
DATE  
To display date and time during playback when  
you press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander  
AREA SET  
DST SET*  
——  
Temporarily change the area where you are using  
your camcorder  
z OFF  
Not during daylight saving time  
During daylight saving time  
ON  
BEEP  
z MELODY  
To output the melody when you start/ stop  
recording or when an unusual condition occurs  
on your camcorder  
NORMAL  
OFF  
To output the beep instead of the melody  
To cancel melody, the beep sound and shutter  
sound  
COMMANDER z ON  
To activate the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder  
OFF  
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid  
remote control misoperation caused by other  
VCR’s remote control  
DISPLAY  
z LCD  
To show the display on the LCD screen and  
viewfinder  
V-OUT/ LCD To show the display on the TV screen, LCD screen  
and viewfinder  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME appears on the screen for some models.  
Note  
If you press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu  
settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when  
your camcorder is connected to the output jacks on the TV or VCR.  
(continued on the following page)  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
REC LAMP  
z ON  
To light up the camera recording lamp at the front  
of your camcorder  
OFF  
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that the  
person is not aware of the recording  
VIDEO EDIT  
z RETURN  
To cancel Digital program editing  
TAPE  
To make programs and perform Digital program  
editing on the tape (p. 78)  
MEMORY  
To make programs and perform Digital program  
editing on the “Memory Stick” (p. 125)  
When recording a close subject  
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of your  
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set  
REC LAMP to OFF.  
In more than five minutes after removing the pow er source  
The PROGRAM AE, FLASH LVL, WHT BAL, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX and  
COMMANDER items are returned to their default settings.  
Other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Tro u b le sh o o t in g —  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to  
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and  
contact your Sony dealer. If “C:ss:ss” appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis  
display function has activated. See page 191.  
Du rin g re co rd in g  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.  
c Set it to CAMERA (p. 25).  
START/ STOP does not operate.  
• Your camcorder automatically turns off to prevent the  
battery pack from running out and to protect the tape  
when your camcorder has been during recording standby  
for more than five minutes.  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA.  
• The tape has run out.  
c Rewind the tape or insert a new one (p. 8, 38).  
• The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.  
c Use a new cassette or slide the tab (p. 195).  
• The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).  
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least  
one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
• Your camcorder automatically turns off to prevent the  
battery pack from running out and to protect the tape  
when your camcorder has been during recording standby  
for more than five minutes.  
The power goes off.  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA.  
• The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a fully charged battery pack.  
• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.  
c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 30).  
The picture in the viewfinder is not  
clear.  
• STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
SteadyShot does not work.  
c Set it to ON (p. 174).  
• The setting is the manual focus.  
The autofocusing function does not  
work.  
c Press FOCUS to set to the autofocus (p. 61).  
• Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.  
c Adjust to focus manually (p. 61).  
• The LCD panel is open.  
c Close the LCD panel (p. 28).  
The picture does not appear in the  
viewfinder.  
• The contrast between the subject and background is too  
high. This is not a malfunction.  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a subject such as lights or a  
candle flame against a dark  
background.  
• This is not a malfunction.  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a very bright subject.  
• SLOW SHTR, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter is  
activated. This is not a malfunction.  
Some tiny spots in white, red, blue or  
green appear on the screen.  
(continued on the following page)  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
An unknown picture appears on the  
screen.  
• If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to  
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu  
settings without a cassette and the “Memory Stick”  
inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the  
demonstration.  
c Insert a cassette/ the “Memory Stick” or press the LCD  
screen. The demonstration stops. You can also set  
DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings (p. 180).  
The picture is recorded in incorrect or  
unnatural colors.  
NIGHTSHOT is slid to ON.  
c Slide it to OFF (p. 32).  
Picture appears too bright, and the  
subject does not appear on the  
screen.  
NIGHTSHOT is slid to ON in a bright place.  
c Slide it to OFF (p. 32).  
• The back light function is active.  
c Set it off (p. 32).  
The click of the shutter does not  
sound.  
• BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 181).  
Black bands appear when you record  
a TV screen or computer screen.  
c Set STEADYSHOT to OFF in the menu settings (p. 174).  
An external flash (optional) does not  
work.  
• The power of the external flash (optional) is off or the  
power source is not installed.  
c Turn on the external flash (optional) or install the power  
source.  
• Two or more external flashes (optional) are attached.  
c Only one external flash (optional) can be attached.  
Flickering or changes in color occurs.  
• Phenomena that appear when recording in the PORTRAIT  
or SPORTS mode of PROGRAM AE in light from a  
discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or  
mercury lamp are not due to a malfunction.  
c Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Du rin g p la yb a ck  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
Playback is not possible.  
• The tape has run out.  
c Rewind the tape (p. 38).  
There are horizontal lines on the  
picture or the playback picture is not  
clear or does not appear.  
• The video head may be dirty.  
c Clean the head using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 203).  
No sound or only a low sound is  
heard when playing back the tape.  
• The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2  
in the menu settings.  
c Set HiFi SOUND to STEREO (p. 175).  
• Volume is turned to minimum.  
c Turn up the volume (p. 37).  
• AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings.  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 175).  
The sound breaks off.  
• The video head may be dirty.  
c Clean the head using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 203).  
Displaying the record date, date  
search does not work.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use a cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 74).  
• CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 178).  
• The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion  
(p. 75).  
Title search does not work.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use a cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 73).  
• CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 178).  
• There is no title in the tape.  
c Superimpose the titles (p. 95).  
• The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion  
(p. 73).  
New sound added to the recorded  
tape is not heard.  
• AUDIO MIX is set to the ST1 side in the menu settings.  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 175).  
The title is not displayed.  
• TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 178).  
Noise appears on the screen followed  
by a PAL indicator.  
• The TV color system of the recorded tape is different to the  
one of your camcorder.  
(continued on the following page)  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Du rin g re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The power does not turn on.  
• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
• The AC Adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.  
c Connect the AC Adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 19).  
End search does not work.  
• The cassette was ejected after recording when using a  
cassette without Cassette Memory (p. 35).  
• You have not recorded on the new cassette yet (p. 35).  
End search does not work correctly.  
• The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle  
(p. 35).  
The battery pack is quickly  
discharged.  
• The temperature of the environment is too low.  
• The battery pack is not fully charged.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).  
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).  
The remaining battery time indicator  
does not indicate the correct time.  
• You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or  
cold environment for a long time.  
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).  
• The battery pack is not fully charged.  
c Install a fully charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the remaining battery time indicator is correct (p. 16).  
The power goes off although the  
remaining battery time indicator  
indicates that the battery pack has  
enough power to operate.  
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the remaining battery time indicator is correct (p. 16).  
The cassette cannot be ejected from  
the compartment.  
• The power source is disconnected.  
c Connect it firmly (p. 15, 19).  
• The battery pack is dead.  
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
The % and Z indicators flash and no  
functions except for cassette ejection  
work.  
• Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
The  
indicator does not appear  
• The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.  
when using the cassette with  
Cassette Memory.  
c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 196).  
The remaining tape indicator is not  
displayed.  
q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape  
indicator (p. 179).  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The “Memory Stick” does not  
function.  
• The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY.  
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 107).  
• The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.  
c Insert the “Memory Stick” (p. 102).  
Recording does not function.  
• The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full  
capacity.  
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 136).  
• The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted.  
c Format the “Memory Stick” using your camcorder or  
use another “Memory Stick” (p. 102, 177).  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 100).  
• You cannot record data in the 100MSDCF folder. It is only  
for playing back data.  
The HOLOGRAM AF light from the  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter deviates  
from the center of the image.  
• The HOLOGRAM AF light is not reaching the subject.  
The HOLOGRAM AF light from the  
HOLOGRAM AF is blurred making  
focusing difficult.  
c Wipe the HOLOGRAM AF emitter with a dry cloth.  
The image cannot be deleted.  
• The image is protected.  
c Cancel image protection (p. 135).  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 100).  
• You try to delete images more than 100 images.  
c You can only choose the image to delete for up to 100  
images at one time.  
You cannot format the “Memory  
Stick.”  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 100).  
Deleting all the images cannot be  
carried out.  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 100).  
You cannot protect the image.  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 100).  
• The index screen does not appear.  
c Press INDEX to display the index screen, then protect  
the image (p. 135).  
(continued on the following page)  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
You cannot write a print mark on the  
still image.  
c Release the lock (p. 100).  
• The index screen does not appear.  
c Press INDEX to display the index screen, then write a  
print mark (p. 140).  
• You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.  
c Print marks cannot be written to a moving picture.  
• A print mark is written on 999 files.  
c A print mark can only be written on up to 999 files.  
• You may not be able to play back images in actual size  
when you try to play back images recorded by other  
equipment. This is not a malfunction.  
You cannot play back images in  
actual size.  
• Your camcorder may not be able to play back some images  
processed with a computer or whose folder or file names  
have been changed with the computer.  
You cannot play back image data.  
• If you record images with any other equipment, the  
images may not be played back normally on your  
camcorder.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Ot h e rs  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
A title is not recorded.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use the cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 95).  
• The Cassette Memory is full.  
c Erase unnecessary title (p. 96).  
• The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not  
visible (p. 195).  
• The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion.  
c Superimpose the title to the recorded position (p. 95).  
A cassette label is not recorded.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use the cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 98).  
• The Cassette Memory is full.  
c Erase unwanted data (p. 96).  
• The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not  
visible (p. 195).  
Digital program editing to the tape  
does not function.  
• The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.  
c Set the selector correctly, then check the connection  
between the VCR and your camcorder (p. 79).  
• Your camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other  
than Sony using the i.LINK cable.  
c Set it to IR (p. 79).  
• Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 84).  
• The synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR is  
not adjusted.  
c Adjust the synchronization of the VCR (p. 82).  
• The IR SETUP code is not correct.  
c Set the correct code (p. 81).  
Digital program editing to the  
“Memory Stick” does not function.  
• Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 125).  
The Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder does not work.  
• COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 181).  
• Something is blocking the infrared rays.  
c Remove the obstacle.  
• The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + –  
polarities incorrectly matching the + – marks.  
c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity (p. 215).  
• The batteries are dead.  
c Insert new ones (p. 215).  
The picture from a TV or VCR does  
not appear even when your  
camcorder is connected to the  
outputs on the TV or VCR.  
• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings.  
c Set it to LCD (p. 181).  
(continued on the following page)  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The melody or beep sounds for  
five seconds.  
• Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least  
one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
• Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.  
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your  
camcorder.  
No function works though the power  
is on.  
c Disconnect the AC Adaptor from a wall outlet or  
remove the battery pack, then reconnect it in about one  
minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not  
work, press the RESET button using a sharp-pointed  
object. (If you press the RESET button, all the settings  
(DCR-TRV80: except the network settings) including the  
date and time return to the default) (p. 15, 19, 210).  
When you set the POWER switch to  
VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move  
your camcorder, you may hear a  
clattering sound from inside your  
camcorder.  
• This is because some functions use a linear mechanism.  
This is not a malfunction.  
While charging the battery pack, no  
indicator appears.  
• The battery pack is not properly installed.  
c Install it properly (p. 15).  
You cannot charge the battery pack.  
• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16).  
The power runs out quickly, even  
though the remaining battery time  
indicator is full.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).  
While charging the battery pack, the  
indicator flashes in the display  
window.  
• The battery pack is not properly installed.  
c Install it properly (p. 15).  
• Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility.  
The buttons do not appear on the  
touch panel.  
• DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO is pressed.  
c Press the LCD screen lightly.  
c Press DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO on your camcorder or  
DISPLAY on the Remote Commander (p. 38).  
The buttons on the LCD screen do  
not work.  
c Adjust the screen (CALIBRATION) (p. 204).  
Image data cannot be transferred to a • The USB cable was connected before installation of the  
computer by the USB connection.  
USB driver was complete.  
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and reinstall the  
USB driver (p. 151).  
• USB STREAM is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 180).  
The cassette cannot be ejected even if • Moisture condensation has started to condense in your  
the cassette lid is open.  
camcorder (p. 202).  
The cassette cannot be ejected.  
c Remove the battery pack, then install it again (p. 15).  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y  
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display  
function.  
LCD scre e n , Vie w fin d e r o r  
d isp la y w in d o w  
This function displays the current condition  
of your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a  
combination of a letter and figures) on the  
LCD screen, viewfinder or display window.  
If a 5-digit code appears, check the following  
code chart. The last two digits (indicated by  
ss) will differ depending on the state of  
your camcorder.  
C:21:00  
Self-diagnosis display  
• C:ss:ss  
You can service your camcorder  
yourself.  
• E:ss:ss  
Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
5-digit display  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
• You are using a battery pack that is not an  
C:04:ss  
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.  
c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 197).  
C:21:ss  
• Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least  
one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
C:22:ss  
• The video heads are dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 203).  
C:31:ss  
C:32:ss  
• A malfunction other than the above that you can service  
has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your  
camcorder. Do not perform this operation if moisture  
starts to condense (p. 202).  
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC Adaptor or  
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power  
source, operate your camcorder.  
c Replace the cassette.  
E:20:ss  
E:61:ss  
E:62:ss  
E:91:ss  
• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.  
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.  
(e.g. E:61:10)  
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times,  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs  
If indicators appear on the screen, check the following:  
See the page in parentheses “( )” for details.  
101-0001 Warning indicator as to file  
Slow flashing:  
• The file is corrupted.  
Warning indicator as to incompatible  
“Memory Stick”*  
Slow flashing:  
• The file is unreadable.  
• You are trying to carry out MEMORY MIX  
on moving pictures (p. 117).  
• An incompatible “Memory Stick” is  
inserted.  
Q Warning indicator as to the tape  
Slow flashing:  
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 191)  
• The tape is near the end.  
No cassette is inserted.*  
• The write-protect tab of the cassette is  
effective (red) (p. 195).*  
E The battery pack is dead or nearly dead  
Slow flashing:  
• The battery pack is nearly dead.  
Depending on operational, environmental  
or battery conditions the E indicator may  
flash, even if there are approximately 5 to  
10 minutes remaining.  
Fast flashing:  
• The tape has run out.*  
Z You need to eject the cassette*  
Slow flashing:  
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is  
effective (red) (p. 195).  
% Moisture condensation has occurred*  
Fast flashing:  
• Eject the cassette, set the POWER switch to  
OFF (CHG), and leave it for about one hour  
with the cassette lid open (p. 202).  
Fast flashing:  
• Moisture condensation has occurred  
(p. 202).  
• The tape has run out.  
• The self-diagnosis display function is  
activated (p. 191).  
Warning indicator as to Cassette  
Memory*  
Slow flashing:  
No cassette with Cassette Memory is  
inserted (p. 194).  
- The image is protected*  
Slow flashing:  
• The image is protected (p. 135).  
Warning indicator as to the “Memory  
Stick”  
Slow flashing:  
Warning indicator as to the flash  
Slow flashing:  
• During charging  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
Fast flashing:  
• The image cannot be recorded on the  
“Memory Stick.”*  
Fast flashing:  
• The self-diagnosis display function is  
activated (p. 191).*  
• There is something wrong with the built-in  
flash or the external flash (optional).  
Warning indicator as to the “Memory  
Stick” formatting*  
Fast flashing:  
• The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted  
(p. 100).  
• The “Memory Stick” is not formatted  
correctly (p. 177).  
Warning indicator as to still image  
recording  
Slow flashing:  
• The still image cannot be recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” (p. 45).  
* You hear the melody or beep sound.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s  
If messages appear on the screen, check the following. See the page in parentheses  
“( )” for details.  
• CLOCK SET  
Set the date and time (p. 20).  
• FOR ”InfoLITHIUM”  
BATTERY ONLY  
Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 197).  
CLEANING CASSETTE  
The video heads are dirty (p. 203).  
The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE“ message  
appear one after another on the screen.  
• COPY INHIBIT  
You tried to record a picture that has a copyright control signal  
(p. 194).1)  
FULL  
16BIT  
The Cassette Memory is full.1)  
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.1) You cannot dub new sound  
(p. 179).  
REC MODE  
TAPE  
REC MODE is set to LP.1) You cannot dub new sound onto a  
tape recorded on equipment of a different TV color system to  
that of your camcorder (p. 179).  
There is no recorded portion on the tape.1) You cannot dub new  
sound.  
”i.LINK” CABLE  
i.LINK cable is connected.1) You cannot dub new sound (p. 94).  
The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 110).1)  
FULL  
-
The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
(p. 100).1)  
NO FILE  
No image is recorded or recognized on the “Memory Stick.”1)  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.1)  
NO MEMORY STICK  
AUDIO ERROR  
You are trying to record an image with sound that cannot be  
recorded by your camcorder on the “Memory Stick” (p. 123).1)  
MEMORY STICK ERROR The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 102).1)  
FORMAT ERROR  
The “Memory Stick” is not recognized (p. 177).1)  
Check the format.  
PLAY ERROR  
REC ERROR  
The image is distorted and cannot be played back.1) 2)  
Turn the POWER switch on again.1)  
INCOMPATIBLE  
MEMORY STICK  
The “Memory Stick” inserted is not compatible with your  
camcorder.1)  
• READ-ONLY MEMORY STICK A read-only “Memory Stick” is inserted.1)  
Q Z TAPE END  
Q NO TAPE  
• DELETING  
The tape has reached the end of the tape.1)  
Insert a cassette.1)  
You press PHOTO on your camcorder while deleting data in  
the “Memory Stick.”1)  
• FORMATTING  
You press PHOTO on your camcorder while formatting the  
“Memory Stick.”1)  
• FOLDER NO. FULL  
You have reached the maximum number of folders that can be  
created.1)  
• USB STREAMING ON GOING You are using USB Streaming function.  
NOW CHARGING  
Charging a built-in flash or an external flash (optional) does not  
work correctly.1)  
1) You hear the melody or beep sound.  
2) Reinsert the “Memory Stick” and play back.  
DCR-TRV80 only  
Refer to the Network Function/ Application Operating Instruction supplied with your camcorder  
193  
about warning messages in the network function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Se le ct in g ca sse t t e t yp e s  
You can use the mini DV  
cassette only.* You cannot use any other 8 mm  
,
Hi8  
ED Betamax  
, Digital8 , VHS  
, DV  
, VHSC  
or MICROMV  
, S-VHS  
cassette.  
, S-VHSC  
, Betamax  
,
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with Cassette Memory and without Cassette  
Memory.  
Cassettes with Cassette Memory have  
(Cassette Memory) mark.  
We recommend that you use cassettes with Cassette Memory.  
IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write  
data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.  
The functions using the Cassette Memory require successive signals recorded on the  
tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions,  
titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly.  
Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape.  
Press END SCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next  
recording if you operate the following:  
– You have ejected the cassette during recording.  
– You have played back the tape.  
– You have used edit search.  
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on the tape, re-record from the  
beginning to the end of the tape as described above.  
The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder  
without Cassette Memory on the tape recorded by one with the Cassette Memory.  
mark on the cassette  
The memory capacity of the tape marked with  
is 4K bits. Your camcorder can  
accommodate up to 16K bits. 16K bits tape is marked with  
.
This is the Mini DV mark.  
This is the Cassette Memory mark.  
These are trademarks.  
Co p yrig h t sig n a l  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck  
If the tape you play back on your camcorder contains copyright signals, you cannot  
copy it with another video camera connected to your camcorder.  
Wh e n yo u re co rd  
You cannot record softw are on your camcorder that contains copyright control  
signals for copyright protection of softw are.  
The COPY INHIBIT indicator appears on the screen, or on the TV screen if you try to  
record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the  
tape when it records.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Au d io m o d e  
12-bit mode:The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in  
stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be  
adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback.  
Both sounds can be played back.  
16-bit mode:A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in  
high quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound recorded in 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back the tape recorded in the 16-bit  
mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on the screen.  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck t h e d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e  
When you play back the dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi  
SOUND in  
to a desired mode in the menu settings (p. 175).  
Sound from speaker  
Playing back the dual  
sound track tape  
HiFi Sound Mode Playing back the stereo tape  
STEREO  
Stereo  
Lch  
Main sound and sub sound  
Main sound  
1
2
Rch  
Sub sound  
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.  
No t e s o n t h e ca sse t t e  
To p re ve n t a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.  
Wh e n a ffixin g a la b e l o n t h e ca sse t t e  
Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a ] so as not to cause  
malfunction of your camcorder.  
Do not affix a label around this  
border.  
[a ]  
Aft e r u sin g t h e ca sse t t e  
Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright  
position.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Wh e n t h e Ca sse t t e Me m o ry fu n ct io n d o e s n o t w o rk  
Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes may be dirty or  
dusty.  
Cle a n in g g o ld -p la t e d co n n e ct o r  
If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape  
indicator sometimes does not appear correctly, and you may not be able to operate  
functions using Cassette Memory.  
Clean up the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times  
ejection of a cassette. [b ]  
[b ]  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM b a t t e ry p a ck  
This unit is compatible with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series). Your  
camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. “InfoLITHIUM” M  
series battery packs have the  
mark.  
TM  
SERIES  
Wh a t is t h e “ In fo LITHIUM b a t t e ry p a ck?  
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for  
communicating information related to operating conditions between your camcorder  
and an optional AC adaptor/ charger.  
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the  
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in  
minutes. With an AC adaptor/ charger (optional), the remaining battery time and  
charging time appear.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
• Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.  
• We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between  
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until the FULL indicator appears in the display window,  
indicating that the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery outside of  
this temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack.  
• After charging is complete, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your  
camcorder or remove the battery pack.  
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
• Battery pack performance decreases in 10°C (50°F) or below surroundings. So, the  
time that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following  
to use the battery pack longer:  
– Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder  
immediately before you start taking shots.  
– Use the large capacity battery pack  
(NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D, optional).  
• Frequently using the LCD screen or frequently operating playback, fast forward or  
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large capacity  
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D, optional).  
• Be certain to set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing  
back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is  
during tape recording standby or playback pause.  
Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,  
and make trial recordings before taking the actual recording.  
• Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water resistant.  
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r  
• If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the  
battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that  
the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that  
the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high  
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is  
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate  
shooting time.  
• The E mark indicating little remaining battery time sometimes flashes depending on  
the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even if the  
remaining battery time is about 5 to 10 minutes.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM b a t t e ry p a ck  
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
• If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per  
year to maintain proper function.  
1. Fully charge the battery pack.  
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.  
3. Remove the battery pack from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.  
• To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder during tape  
recording standby until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.  
Ba t t e ry life  
• The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and  
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a  
probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Please buy a new  
battery pack.  
• The battery life varies depending on how it is stored and operating conditions and  
environment for each battery pack.  
“InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
The DV Interface on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV Interface. This section  
describes the i.LINK standard and its features.  
Wh a t is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK, and for controlling other  
equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.  
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy  
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that  
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected  
equipment.  
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations  
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.  
Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK  
cable. When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more  
DV Interfaces, refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected.  
About the name “i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by Sony, and  
is a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers.  
i.LINK b a u d ra t e  
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud  
rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200Mbps)  
S400 (approx. 400Mbps)  
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the operating instructions of each  
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK on some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
“S100.”  
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.  
*What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received  
in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps means that 100 megabits of data  
can be sent in one second.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it  
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having  
DV Interface, see page 76 and 87.  
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV Interface) compatible equipment  
made by Sony (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment.  
Before connecting this unit to a computer, make sure that application software  
supported by this unit is already installed on a computer.  
Even if a video device such as a digital TV, DVD or MICROMV has an i.LINK, it may  
not support digital video. Confirm digital video compatibility before connecting.  
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating  
instructions for the equipment to be connected.  
Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details,  
refer to the separate Network Function/ Application Operating Instructions. (DCR-  
TRV80 only)  
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC Adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.  
Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if necessary, depending on the  
design of the wall outlet [b ].  
AC-L15A/L15B  
[a ]  
[b ]  
Your camcorder is an NTSC system-based camcorder. If you want to view the playback  
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system-based TV with the AUDIO/ VIDEO input  
jack.  
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.  
NTSC system  
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,  
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,  
Venezuela, etc.  
PAL system  
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,  
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,  
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,  
United Kingdom etc.  
PAL-M system  
Brazil  
PAL-N system  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
SECAM system  
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n  
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may  
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this  
condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may  
not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and  
the % indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is  
inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not  
appear.  
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d  
None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your  
camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid open. Your camcorder  
can be used again if the % or Z indicator does not appear when the power is turned on  
again.  
If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation.  
If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid  
is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is  
ejected.  
Note on moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm  
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:  
– You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating  
device.  
– You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place  
outside.  
– You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.  
– You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place.  
How to prevent moisture condensation  
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your  
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature  
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n  
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d  
To ensure normal recording, clear pictures and sound, clean the video head. The video  
head may be dirty when:  
– Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.  
– Playback pictures do not move.  
– Playback pictures do not appear or the sound breaks off.  
– The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another  
or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording.  
If the above problem, [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with  
the Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above  
problem persists, repeat cleaning.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].  
Note on the video head  
The video head suffers from wear after long use. If you cannot obtain a clear image  
even after using a cleaning cassette, it might be because the video head is worn. Please  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility to have the video head  
replaced.  
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n  
If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using a cleaning cloth  
(supplied) to clean the LCD screen. When you use the LCD Cleaning Kit (optional), do  
not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the LCD screen. Clean the LCD screen with  
cleaning paper moistened with the liquid.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry  
Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery so that the date, time and other  
settings are retained even when the POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG). The built-in  
rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The  
battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It  
will be completely discharged in about three months if you do not use your  
camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not  
affect your camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if  
the battery is discharged.  
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery  
• Connect your camcorder to the house current using the AC Adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG)  
for more than 24 hours.  
• Or install the fully charged rechargeable battery pack on your camcorder, and leave  
your camcorder with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n (CALIBRATION)  
The buttons on the touch panel may not work correctly. If this happens, follow the  
procedure below.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Eject the tape from your camcorder, then disconnect any connecting cable from  
your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO on  
your camcorder, then keep pressing DISPLAY/ BATTERY INFO for about five  
seconds.  
(4) Touch  
(DCR-TRV80 only).  
The position of changes.  
displayed on the screen with your finger or the supplied stylus  
CALIBRATE  
Notes  
• If you do not press the right spot, start from step 4 again.  
• You cannot calibrate the LCD screen when you close the LCD panel with the LCD  
screen facing out.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Pre ca u t io n s  
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n  
• Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC Adaptor).  
• For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating  
instructions.  
• If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it  
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.  
• Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.  
• Keep the POWER switch setting to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your  
camcorder.  
• Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so  
might cause heat to build up inside.  
• Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.  
• Do not press the LCD screen with a sharp objects other than the supplied stylus.  
(DCR-TRV80 only)  
• If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD  
screen. This is not a malfunction.  
• While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a  
malfunction.  
On h a n d lin g t h e t a p e  
• Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are  
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.  
• Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.  
• Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with  
a soft cloth.  
Ca m co rd e r ca re  
• Eject the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR  
sections and play back the tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not  
to be used for a long time.  
• Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,  
remove them with a soft cloth.  
• Clean your camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened  
with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the  
finish.  
• Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy  
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause  
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
AC Ad a p t o r  
• Unplug the unit from a wall outlet when you are not using the unit for a long time. To  
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.  
• Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or  
damaged.  
• Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage  
the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock.  
• Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the  
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.  
• Always keep metal contacts clean.  
• Do not disassemble the unit.  
• Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.  
• While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers  
and video equipment because it will disturb AM reception and video operation.  
• The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.  
• Do not place the unit in locations that are:  
– Extremely hot or cold  
– Dusty or dirty  
– Very humid  
– Vibrating  
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s  
• Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instance:  
– When there are fingerprints on the lens surface  
– In hot or humid locations  
– When the lens is used in environments such as the seaside  
• Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.  
To prevent mold from occurring, periodically perform the above.  
We recommend turning on and operating your camcorder about once per month to  
keep your camcorder in an optimum state for a long time.  
Re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry p a ck  
• Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.  
• To prevent an accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into  
contact with the battery terminals.  
• Keep the rechargeable battery pack away from fire.  
Never expose the rechargeable battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such  
as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.  
• Store the rechargeable battery pack in a cool, dry place.  
• Do not expose the rechargeable battery pack to any mechanical shock.  
• Do not disassemble nor modify the rechargeable battery pack.  
• Install the rechargeable battery pack to the video equipment securely.  
• Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
No t e o n d ry b a t t e rie s  
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:  
– Be sure to insert the batteries with the + – polarities matched to the + – marks.  
– Dry batteries are not rechargeable.  
– Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.  
– Do not use different types of batteries.  
– Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.  
– Do not use leaking batteries.  
If batteries are leaking  
• Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.  
• If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.  
• If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a  
doctor.  
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Minimum illumination  
7 lx (lux) (F 1.8)  
0 lx (lux) (in NightShot)*  
* Objects unable to be seen due to  
the dark can be shot with  
infrared lighting.  
Wire le ss co m m u n ica t io n s  
Vid e o ca m e ra  
re co rd e r  
(DCR-TRV80 only)  
Communications system  
Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1  
Max. baud rate1) 2)  
Approx. 723 kbps  
Output  
Syst e m  
Video recording system  
2 rotary heads  
In p u t /Ou t p u t co n n e ct o rs  
Helical scanning system  
Audio recording system  
Rotary heads, PCM system  
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,  
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits  
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)  
Video signal  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
Usable cassette  
Mini DV cassette with the  
mark printed  
Tape speed  
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/ s  
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/ s  
Recording/playback time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
SP: 1 hour  
Bluetooth standard Power Class 2  
Communications distance2)  
Max. wireless distance  
Approx. 10 m (393 3/ 4 in.) (When  
connecting to BTA-NW1/ NW1A)  
Compatible Bluetooth profile3)  
Generic Access Profile  
Dial-up Networking Profile  
Basic Image Profile  
(Image Push Initiator, Image Push  
Responder, Remote Camera  
Responder)  
Operating frequency band  
2.4 GHz band (2.400 GHz –  
2.483 5 GHz)  
S video input/output  
4-pin mini DIN  
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Audio/Video input/output  
AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
327 mV, (at output impedance  
more than 47 k(kilohms))  
Output impedance with less than  
2.2 k(kilohms)/ Stereo minijack  
(ø 3.5 mm)  
Input impedance more than  
47 k(kilohms)  
DV input/output  
4-pin connector  
Headphone jack  
1)  
Max. baud rate of Bluetooth  
standard Ver.1.1  
Varies according to the distance  
between communicating  
devices, presence of obstacles,  
radiowave conditions, and other  
factors.  
LP: 1.5 hours  
2)  
Fastforw ard/rew ind time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
Approx. 2 min. and 40 seconds  
View finder  
Electric viewfinder (color)  
Image device  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
LANC jack  
Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)  
USB jack  
3)  
This is a specification matched  
5.0 mm (1/ 3.6 type) CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device)  
Gross: Approx. 2 110 000 pixels  
Effective (still):  
DCR-TRV75:  
mini-B  
DCR-TRV80:  
mini-AB  
to specific usage requirements  
between Bluetooth compatible  
devices. It is laid down in the  
Bluetooth standards.  
Approx. 1 920 000 pixels  
Effective (moving):  
Approx. 1 080 000 pixels  
Lens  
Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T*  
Combined power zoom lens  
Filter diameter: 37 mm  
(1 1/ 2 in)  
10× (Optical), 120× (Digital)  
F = 1.8 – 2.1  
MIC jack  
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance  
with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output  
impedance 6.8 k(kilohms)  
(ø 3.5 mm)  
Stereo type  
LCD scre e n  
Picture  
8.8 cm (3.5 type)  
Total dot number  
184 000 (840 × 220)  
Focal length  
4.5 – 45 mm (3/ 16 – 1 13/ 16 in.)  
When converted to a 35 mm still  
camera  
In CAMERA:  
52 – 520 mm (2 1/ 8 – 20 1/ 2 in.)  
In MEMORY:  
39 – 390 mm (1 9/ 16 – 15 3/ 8 in.)  
Color temperature  
Auto, HOLD, INDOOR (3 200 K),  
OUTDOOR (5 800 K)  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Ge n e ra l  
Re ch a rg e a b le  
b a t t e ry p a ck  
NP-FM50  
Pow er requirements  
7.2 V (battery pack)  
8.4 V (AC Adaptor)  
Average pow er consumption  
(w hen using the battery pack)  
During camera recording using  
LCD  
5.1 W  
Viewfinder  
4.1 W  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to + 60°C  
(–4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
73 × 93 × 169 mm  
Maximum output voltage  
DC 8.4 V  
Output voltage  
DC 7.2 V  
Capacity  
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm  
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
76 g (2.7 oz)  
Type  
Lithium ion  
(2 7/ 8 × 3 3/ 4 × 6 3/ 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
720 g (1 lb 9 oz)  
main unit only  
Me m o ry St ick”  
820 g (1 lb 12 oz)  
Memory  
including the rechargeable battery  
pack NP-FM50, cassette DVM60  
and lens cap  
Supplied accessories  
See page 14.  
Flash memory  
8MB: MSA-8A  
Operating voltage  
2.7 – 3.6 V  
Pow er consumption  
Approx. 45 mA during operation  
mode  
Approx. 130 µA during tape  
recording standby  
Dimensions (approx.)  
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm  
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
AC Ad a p t o r  
AC-L15A/L15B  
Pow er requirements  
100 – 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz  
Current consumption  
0.35 – 0.18 A  
Pow er consumption  
18 W  
4 g (0.14 oz)  
Design and specifications are  
subject to change without notice.  
Output voltage  
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to + 60°C  
(–4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
56 × 31 × 100 mm  
(2 1/ 4 × 1 1/ 4 × 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
excluding projecting parts  
Mass (approx.)  
190 g (6.7 oz)  
excluding power cord  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Qu ick Re fe re n ce —  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Ca m co rd e r  
5
6
1
7
8
9
2
3
4
q;  
1 LCD/Touch panel screen (p. 23, 28, 29)  
2 Speaker  
5 View finder lens adjustment lever  
(p. 30)  
6 BATT release button (p. 15)  
7 START/STOP button (p. 25)  
8 Access lamp  
3 OPEN button (p. 25)  
4 RESET button  
If you press RESET, all the settings  
(DCR-TRV80: except the network  
settings) including the date and time  
return to the default.  
9 “Memory Stick” slot (p. 102)  
q; DISPLAY/BATTERY INFO button  
(p. 18, 38)  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
qg  
qa  
qh  
qj  
qk  
ql  
qs  
qd  
qf  
qa Hooks for shoulder strap  
qs Battery pack (p. 15)  
qg Cassette compartment  
qh Cassette lid (p. 8)  
qd FOCUS button (p. 61)  
qf BACK LIGHT button (p. 32)  
qj  
OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 8)  
qk Lens cap (p. 25)  
ql Tripod receptacle  
Make sure that the length of the tripod  
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 inch).  
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod  
securely, and the screw may damage  
your camcorder.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
wh  
wj  
w;  
wa  
ws  
wd  
wf  
wk  
wl  
wg  
w; Flash (p. 111)  
wh View finder (p. 30)  
wa Focus ring (p. 61)  
ws Lens  
wj Display w indow (p. 16)  
wk HOLOGRAM AF emitter (p. 113)  
wl Remote sensor  
wd Camera recording lamp (p. 25)  
wf Infrared rays emitter (p. 32, 80)  
wg Microphone  
Note on the Carl Zeiss lens  
Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce fine images.  
The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and  
Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF# measurement system for video camera and  
offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.  
The lens for your camcorder is also T*-coated to suppress unwanted reflection and  
faithfully reproduce colors.  
#
MTF Stands for Modulation Transfer Function.  
The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject coming into the lens.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
e;  
eg  
eh  
ea  
ej  
ek  
es  
ed  
el  
ef  
e; PHOTO button (p. 44, 107, 114)  
eg EDITSEARCH button (p. 35)  
eh Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 92)  
ej Shoe cover (p. 92)  
ea Pow er zoom lever (p. 31, 71, 133)  
es NIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 32)  
ed Stylus holder (DCR-TRV80 only)  
ek  
(flash) button (p.111)  
(p. 170)  
el Grip belt  
ef Stylus (DCR-TRV80 only) (p. 170)  
Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe  
• The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video  
light or microphone.  
• The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the  
power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the  
accessory for details.  
• The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory  
securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten  
the screw.  
• To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the  
accessory.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
r;  
ra  
rg  
rh  
rj  
rs  
rk  
rl  
t;  
rd  
rf  
r; DV Interface (p. 76, 87, 167)  
rg S VIDEO jack (p. 42)  
The DV Interface is i.LINK compatible.  
rh  
(Bluetooth) lamp (DCR-TRV80 only)  
(p. 169)  
ra (USB) jack (p. 141)  
rs LOCK sw itch (p. 26)  
rd POWER sw itch (p. 25)  
rf DC IN jack (p. 16)  
rj  
(LANC) jack (blue)  
rk MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack (red)  
Connect an external microphone  
(optional). This jack also accepts a  
“plug-in-power” microphone.  
When the external microphone is  
connected, it takes precedence.  
rl i (headphones) jack (green)  
When you use headphones, the speaker  
on your camcorder is silent.  
t; AUDIO/VIDEO jack (p. 42, 76, 87, 167)  
About  
(Bluetooth) lamp (DCR-TRV80 only)  
The blue lamp lights up when your camcorder is exchanging data with a device which  
has Bluetooth function.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder  
function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.  
8
1
9
0
qa  
qs  
2
3
4
5
qd  
6
7
qf  
1 PHOTO button (p. 44, 107, 114)  
2 DISPLAY button (p. 38)  
3 Memory control buttons  
4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 73, 74)  
5 Video control buttons (p. 40)  
6 REC button  
8 Transmitter  
Point toward the remote sensor to  
control your camcorder after turning on  
your camcorder.  
9 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 72)  
q; START/STOP button (p. 25)  
qa DATA CODE button (p. 38)  
qs Pow er zoom button (p. 31, 71, 133)  
qd ./> buttons (p. 73, 74)  
qf AUDIO DUB button (p. 93)  
7 MARK button (p. 84)  
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – on the batteries to the + and –  
in the battery compartment.  
Notes on the Remote Commander  
• Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or  
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.  
• Your camcorder works in the Commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the Commander mode VTR  
2, we recommend changing the Commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR  
215  
with black paper.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs  
LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r  
Disp la y w in d o w  
qd  
qf  
qg  
qh  
qj  
qk  
ql  
w;  
1
2
3
4
5
wj  
:
:
50min  
STILL  
STBY  
0 48 00  
12min  
+
6
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
END  
wa  
ws  
:
16 9WIDE  
NEG. ART  
SEARCH  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
F1.8 9dB  
B wk  
DV IN  
16BIT  
wd  
wf  
wg  
wh  
7
8
9
0
qa  
qs  
1 Cassette Memory (p. 12, 194)  
qj NIGHTSHOT (p. 32)/SUPER NIGHTSHOT  
(p. 33)/COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (p. 33)  
2 Remaining battery time (p. 27)  
qk Warning (p. 192)  
3 Zoom (p. 31)/Exposure (p. 59)/  
Data file name (p. 128)  
ql Time code (p. 27)/Tape counter  
(p. 27, 39)/Self-diagnosis (p. 191)/Photo  
recording (p. 44, 107)/Image number  
(p. 128)/Playback folder (p. 132)  
4 Digital effect (p. 54, 70)/MEMORY MIX  
(p. 116)/Fader (p. 50)  
5 16:9WIDE (p. 48)  
w; Remaining tape (p. 27)/Memory  
6 Picture effect (p. 53, 69)  
7 Data code (p. 39)  
playback (p. 128)  
wa ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 72)  
ws END SEARCH (p. 35)  
8 Volume (p. 37)/Date (p. 27)/Time  
(p. 27)  
wd A/V t DV (p. 167)/DV IN (p. 88)  
wf Audio mode (p. 179)/Recording folder  
9 PROGRAM AE (p. 57)  
0 Back light (p. 32)  
(p. 127)  
qa SteadyShot off (p. 174)  
qs Manual focus/Expanded focus (p. 61)  
qd Self-timer (p. 46, 122)  
wg Flash (p. 111)  
This indicator appears only when the  
flash is in use.  
qf Recording mode (p. 27)  
qg HOLOGRAM AF (p. 113)  
wh Continuous photo recording (p. 109)  
wj Remaining battery time (p. 27)/Tape  
counter (p. 27, 39)/Image number/  
Memory capacity/Time code (p. 27)/  
Self-diagnosis (p. 191)  
qh STBY/REC (p. 27)/Video control mode  
(p. 40)/Image size (p. 104)/Image  
quality (p. 103)  
wk FULL charge (p. 16)  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d e x  
HOLOGRAM AF .................. 113  
Progressive Recording Mode  
................................................ 66  
PROGRAM AE....................... 57  
A, B  
AC Adaptor ............................. 16  
Adjusting the viewfinder ...... 30  
Audio dubbing ........................ 91  
AUDIO MIX .......................... 175  
AUDIO MODE ...................... 179  
Auto red-eye reduction ........ 111  
AUTO SHTR .......................... 173  
A/ V connecting cable .................  
42, 76, 87, 167  
BACK LIGHT .......................... 32  
Battery Info .............................. 18  
Battery pack ............................. 15  
BEEP ....................................... 181  
BOUNCE .................................. 50  
I, J, K, L  
i.LINK ..................................... 199  
i.LINK cable ............... 76, 87, 167  
Image protection ................... 135  
Image quality ........................ 103  
Image size .............................. 104  
Image Transport ................... 171  
Index screen ........................... 129  
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack  
.............................................. 197  
Infrared rays emitter ........ 32, 80  
Insert editing ........................... 89  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
........................................ 92, 213  
Interval Recording .................. 64  
Interval Photo Recording .... 119  
JPEG ........................................ 100  
Labeling a cassette .................. 98  
LANC jack ............................. 214  
LUMI. ....................................... 54  
R
REC FOLDER ........................ 127  
Recording time ........................ 17  
Rec Review .............................. 36  
Remaining battery time  
indicator ................................ 27  
Remaining tape indicator ...... 27  
Remote Camera ..................... 171  
Remote Commander ............ 215  
Remote sensor ....................... 212  
RESET ..................................... 210  
Resize ...................................... 139  
C, D  
S
CALIBRATION ..................... 204  
Cassette Memory ............ 12, 194  
C. CHROM ............................ 116  
Charging battery pack ........... 16  
Charging built-in rechargeable  
battery ................................. 204  
CLEANING CASSETTE ...... 203  
Clock set ................................... 20  
Color Slow Shutter ................. 33  
Continuous photo recording  
.............................................. 109  
Data code ................................. 38  
Date search .............................. 74  
DEMO MODE ....................... 180  
Digital effect ...................... 54, 70  
Digital program editing  
Self-diagnosis display .......... 191  
Self-timer recording ....... 46, 122  
SHARPNESS ......................... 173  
Signal convert function ........ 167  
Skip scan .................................. 40  
Slide show .............................. 134  
SLOW SHTR ............................ 54  
SPOT FOCUS .......................... 63  
STEADYSHOT ...................... 174  
Stereo tape ............................. 195  
STILL ........................................ 54  
Sub sound .............................. 195  
Super NightShot ..................... 33  
S VIDEO jack ........................... 42  
M, N  
Main sound ............................ 195  
Manual exposure .................... 59  
Manual focus ........................... 61  
M. CHROM ........................... 116  
M. LUMI ................................ 116  
MEMORY MIX ...................... 116  
Memory PB ZOOM .............. 133  
Memory Photo recording .... 107  
“Memory Stick” .................... 100  
“Memory Stick” capacity  
...................................... 104, 106  
Menu settings ........................ 172  
Mirror mode ............................ 29  
Moisture condensation ........ 202  
MONOTONE .......................... 50  
MOSC. FADER........................ 50  
M. OVERLAP ........................ 116  
MPEG ..................................... 100  
Network function ................. 169  
NIGHTSHOT .......................... 32  
NORMAL .............................. 109  
NORM. FADER ...................... 50  
NTSC system ......................... 201  
........................................ 78, 125  
DISPLAY .................................. 38  
DOT .......................................... 50  
Dual sound track tape .......... 195  
T, U, V  
Tape counter ............................ 27  
Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 71  
Telephoto ................................. 31  
Time code ................................. 27  
Title ........................................... 95  
Title search ............................... 73  
Touch panel ............................. 23  
TRAIL ....................................... 54  
Transition ................................. 26  
TV color systems ................... 201  
USB jack ................................. 141  
USB Streaming ...................... 154  
E
Edit search ............................... 36  
End search ............................... 35  
Expanded focus ....................... 61  
EXP BRKTG ........................... 109  
F, G, H  
Fader ......................................... 50  
Flash ........................................ 111  
FLASH ...................................... 54  
Flexible Spot Meter ................. 60  
Format .................................... 177  
Frame recording ...................... 65  
Full charge ............................... 16  
Grip belt ................................. 213  
i (headphone) jack .............. 214  
Heads ...................................... 203  
HiFi SOUND ......................... 175  
HIGH SPEED ........................ 109  
W, X, Y, Z  
O, P, Q  
Warning indicators ............... 192  
Warning messages ................ 193  
White balance .......................... 47  
Wide-angle .............................. 31  
Wide mode .............................. 48  
WIPE ......................................... 50  
Write-protect tab ................... 100  
Zero set memory ..................... 72  
Zoom ........................................ 31  
OLD MOVIE ............................ 54  
OVERLAP ................................ 50  
Operation indicators ............ 216  
PB FOLDR.............................. 132  
Picture effect ...................... 53, 69  
Picture search .......................... 40  
Playback time .......................... 18  
Print mark .............................. 140  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed on 100% recycled paper using  
VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free  
vegetable oil based ink.  
3
0
8
0
1
6
2
1
2
Printed in Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Projector XG C60X User Manual
Shure Microphone 27C687 User Manual
Shure Microphone AXT200 User Manual
Snapper CRT Television EZT18542150ZBVE 2690612 User Manual
Snapper Lawn Mower 06124 User Manual
Sony Camcorder 3 087 936 131 User Manual
Sony Radio SRF S54 User Manual
Sony Stereo System CMT HP7 User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Product 1086447 2 A User Manual
Sylvania Portable CD Player SCD152 User Manual